You are on page 1of 478

Honeywell Process Solutions

SoftMaster
User's Guide
ML200-SoftMaster
R200
January 2011

Release 200
Honeywell
Notices and Trademarks
Copyright 2011 by Honeywell International Sárl.
Release 200 January 2011

While this information is current in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express
warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.

In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The
information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.

Honeywell, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International Inc.

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Honeywell Process Solutions


1860 W. Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ 85027 USA
1-800 822-7673

ii SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
About This Document
This document describes the operations involved in using SoftMaster to program and
debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series.

Release Information
Document Name Document Release Publication
ID Number Date

SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200 ML200- 200 January


SoftMaster 2011

References
The following list identifies all documents that may be source of reference for material discussed
in this publication.

Document Title

2MLI CPUU User’s Guide

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide iii


January 2011 Honeywell
Support and Other Contacts

Support and Other Contacts


United States and Canada
Contact: Honeywell Solution Support Center
Phone: 1-800-822-7673
Calls are answered by dispatcher between 6:00 am and 4:00 pm
Mountain Standard Time. Emergency calls outside normal working hours
are received by an answering service and returned within one hour.
Fascimile: 1-973-455-5000
Mail: Honeywell TAC, MS L17
1860 W. Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ, 85027 USA

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)


Contact: Honeywell TAC-EMEA
Phone: +32-2-728-2345
Fascimile: +32-2-728-2696
Mail: TAC-BE02
Hermes Plaza
Hermeslaan, 1H
B-1831 Diegem, Belgium

Pacific
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – Pacific
Phone: 1300-364-822 (toll free within Australia)
+61-8-9362-9559 (outside Australia)
Fascimile: +61-8-9362-9564
Mail: Honeywell Limited Australia
5 Kitchener Way
Burswood 6100, Western Australia
Email: GTAC@honeywell.com

India
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – India
Phone: +91-20- 6603-9400
Fascimile: +91-20- 6603-9800
Mail: Honeywell Automation India Ltd
56 and 57, Hadapsar Industrial Estate
Hadapsar, Pune –411 013, India
Email: Global-TAC-India@honeywell.com

iv SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Support and Other Contacts

Korea
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – Korea
Phone: +82-2-799-6317
Fascimile: +82-2-792-9015
Mail: Honeywell Co., Ltd
4F, Sangam IT Tower
1590, DMC Sangam-dong, Mapo-gu
Seoul, 121-836, Korea
Email: Global-TAC-Korea@honeywell.com

People’s Republic of China


Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – China
Phone: +86- 21-2219-6888
800-820-0237
400-820-0386
Mail: Honeywell (China) Co., Ltd
33/F, Tower A, City Center, 100 Zunyi Rd.
Shanghai 200051, People’s Republic of China
Email: Global-TAC-China@honeywell.com

Singapore
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – South East Asia
Phone: +65-6580-3500
Fascimile: +65-6580-3501
+65-6445-3033
Mail: Honeywell Private Limited
Honeywell Building
17, Changi Business Park Central 1
Singapore 486073
Email: GTAC-SEA@honeywell.com

Taiwan
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – Taiwan
Phone: +886-7-536-2567
Fascimile: +886-7-536-2039
Mail: Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
17F-1, No. 260, Jhongshan 2nd Road.
Cianjhen District
Kaohsiung, Taiwan, ROC
Email: Global-TAC-Taiwan@honeywell.com

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide v


January 2011 Honeywell
Support and Other Contacts

Japan
Contact: Honeywell Global TAC – Japan
Phone: +81-3-6730-7160
Fascimile: +81-3-6730-7228
Mail: Honeywell Japan Inc.
New Pier Takeshiba, South Tower Building,
20th Floor, 1-16-1 Kaigan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 105-0022, Japan
Email: Global-TAC-JapanJA25@honeywell.com

Elsewhere
Call your nearest Honeywell office.

World Wide Web


Honeywell Solution Support Online:

http://www.honeywell.com/ps

Training Classes
Honeywell Automation College:

http://www.automationcollege.com

vi SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Acronyms and Definitions

Acronyms and Definitions

Acronym/Term Definition

A/D Analog to Digital Conversion

Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power


Base supply, communication and other modules gets installed
For example: main base, expansion base.

BCD Binary coded decimal

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the


variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
Cold restart is restarted. With the CPU restart mode set to cold restart,
all the parameters (like the internal register, timer, and
counter) initialize to zero.

CPU Central processing unit

D/A Digital to analog conversion

Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC


standard addressing notations with or without any variable
Direct variable name. They are %I (input), %Q (output), and %M (internal
flags and registers) variables.

Address Examples: %IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, and %MD1234

Dnet DeviceNet Network.

FEnet Fast Ethernet Network.

FO Fiber Optic

Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation


Function results for an input such as four arithmetical operations
and comparative operations.

Is an operation unit that memorizes the operation results


within the commands such as timer and counter or results
derived from several scans. Function blocks are the
Function block
fundamental element for logic programs. Function blocks
like timer and counter have input and output connections
to indicate the flow.

HSL High-Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200


communication modules.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide vii


January 2011 Honeywell
Acronyms and Definitions

Acronym/Term Definition

I/O Input/Output

Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain


I/O image area
I/O states.

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a


given condition, in addition, to regular scan programs. It
consists of two types:
Interrupt task
• Timer interrupt task

• Internal flag interrupt task

KB Kilo bytes

KStep Kilo steps

LSB Least significant bit

MB Mega bytes

ML-200 MasterLogic-200

A standard component with a specific function to configure


a system, such as the I/O board assembled to be inserted
Module into the base motherboard.

For example: CPU module, power module, and I/O


module.

MSB Most significant bit

O/S Operating system

P2P Point to point service in MasterLogic-200 communication


modules

PAC Process automation controller

PLC Programmable logic controller

A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules, and


PLC system peripherals, configured to be controlled by a user
program.

Pnet Profibus-DP network.

viii SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Acronyms and Definitions

Acronym/Term Definition

RAM Random access memory

As an abbreviation of real time clock, it is collectively


RTC
referred as a universal IC, with the function of a clock.

RTC Real time clock

Snet Serial link network.

Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a


SoftMaster
program.

STP Shielded twisted pair

Named variables which are declared with a name, type,


but address is automatically allocated in symbolic memory
Symbolic variable area (%A) by the CPU. For instance, named variables
declared as ‘Valve1’, ‘Pump2’ or ‘Speed3’ with any IEC
standard data type.

TP Twisted pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45


connectors for Ethernet communication)

UTP Unshield twisted pair

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the


variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
Warm restart is restarted. When the CPU restart mode is set to warm
restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer
and counter) retain the previous values.

A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a


Watchdog timer program and to generate a warning, when it is not
complete within the time.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide ix


January 2011 Honeywell
Symbol Definitions

Symbol Definitions
The following table lists the symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

ATTENTION: Identifies information that requires special


consideration.

TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of


performing a task.

REFERENCE -EXTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of


information outside of the bookset.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of


information within the bookset.

CAUTION Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment


or work (data) on the system being damaged or lost, or may result in
the inability to properly operate the process.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not


avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices.

CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product


manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not


avoided, could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product


manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.

WARNING, Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where


HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or
60 VDC may be accessible.

x SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Symbol Definitions

Symbol Definition

ESD HAZARD: Danger of an electro-static discharge to which


equipment may be sensitive. Observe precautions for handling
electrostatically sensitive devices.

Protective Earth (PE) terminal: Provided for connection of the


protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Functional earth terminal: Used for non-safety purposes such as


noise immunity improvement.

NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the


source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code
requirements.

Earth Ground: Functional earth connection.

NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the


source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.

Chassis Ground: Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of


the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of
supply in accordance with national and local electrical code
requirements.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xi


January 2011 Honeywell
Symbol Definitions

xii SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Contents

1. INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................25
1.1 Features of SoftMaster ................................................................................. 25
1.2 System requirements .................................................................................... 27

2. INSTALLATION ...........................................................................29
2.1 Installing SoftMaster ..................................................................................... 29
2.2 Installing the USB device driver .................................................................. 31
Verifying the USB device driver installation ..........................................................................32

3. BASIC APPLICATION .................................................................35


3.1 SoftMaster user interface ............................................................................. 35
Menu bar ..............................................................................................................................36
Tool bar ................................................................................................................................45
Status display line ................................................................................................................46
Change view window ...........................................................................................................47
3.2 Edit functions ................................................................................................ 47
Cut–paste .............................................................................................................................47
Copy–paste ..........................................................................................................................47
Drag and drop ......................................................................................................................47
Zooming in/zooming out .......................................................................................................48
3.3 Shortcut keys................................................................................................. 49
Configuring shortcut keys .....................................................................................................49
Shortcut keys .......................................................................................................................49
3.4 Customizing SoftMaster ............................................................................... 51
Configuring SoftMaster options ............................................................................................52
Configuring LD option ..........................................................................................................57
Configuring SFC option ........................................................................................................58
Configuring ST option ..........................................................................................................60

4. PROJECT CONFIGURATION ......................................................63


4.1 Overview of project configuration ............................................................... 63
Project configuration window................................................................................................63

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xiii


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

4.2 Project management .....................................................................................65


Creating a new project ........................................................................................................ 65
Opening the project ............................................................................................................. 66
Opening a project from PLC ................................................................................................ 66
Saving a project................................................................................................................... 66
Saving project as ................................................................................................................. 67
4.3 Project item ....................................................................................................68
Add item .............................................................................................................................. 68
Adding a program ................................................................................................................ 72
Exporting to file.................................................................................................................... 72
Importing from file................................................................................................................ 75
Changing program execution sequence .............................................................................. 79
Comparing projects ............................................................................................................. 80
4.4 Project password ...........................................................................................81
Setting project password ..................................................................................................... 81
Deleting password ............................................................................................................... 82

5. VARIABLES ................................................................................ 83
5.1 Overview of variables ....................................................................................83
5.2 Global/direct variable ....................................................................................83
Global variable .................................................................................................................... 83
Direct variable comments .................................................................................................... 84
Flag ..................................................................................................................................... 84
5.3 Global/direct variable edit .............................................................................86
Global/direct variable registration ........................................................................................ 86
Copy, cut, delete, and paste ................................................................................................ 88
Changing variable name ..................................................................................................... 93
Insert line ............................................................................................................................. 93
Delete line ........................................................................................................................... 94
Drag and drop ..................................................................................................................... 94
Export to file ........................................................................................................................ 95
Preview ............................................................................................................................... 95
Print ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Other functions .................................................................................................................... 96
5.4 Local variable .................................................................................................97
Local variable registration ................................................................................................... 97
Editing a local variable ........................................................................................................ 97
5.5 Function block variable...............................................................................100
FB variable ........................................................................................................................ 100
FB variable edit ................................................................................................................. 100
FB variable registration ..................................................................................................... 100

xiv SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions

5.6 FUNCTION variable ..................................................................................... 103


FUN variable ......................................................................................................................103
FUN variable edit ...............................................................................................................103
FUN variable registration....................................................................................................103
5.7 Editing variables.......................................................................................... 105
Variable registration ...........................................................................................................105
5.8 User-defined function/function block ....................................................... 107
Creating user-defined function/function block program ......................................................108
Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable .................................................109
User-defined function/function block programming ............................................................110
Using user-defined function/function blocks .......................................................................111

6. LD EDIT ......................................................................................113
6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 113
6.2 Limits ............................................................................................................ 113
6.3 Program edit ................................................................................................ 114
Edit tools ............................................................................................................................114
Input contact point ..............................................................................................................116
Input OR contact point .......................................................................................................117
Entering variable/address...................................................................................................118
Inserting lines .....................................................................................................................121
Inserting coil .......................................................................................................................121
Inserting a function block ...................................................................................................122
Favorite function block .......................................................................................................124
Entering comments ............................................................................................................127
Input label...........................................................................................................................129
Insert extension function ....................................................................................................130
Insert cell ............................................................................................................................131
Insert line............................................................................................................................131
Delete item .........................................................................................................................132
Delete cell ..........................................................................................................................132
Delete line ..........................................................................................................................133
Copy/cut/paste ...................................................................................................................133
Undo and redo ...................................................................................................................134
Program edit mode .............................................................................................................135
6.4 Viewing program options ........................................................................... 138
View IL program .................................................................................................................138
Program magnification change...........................................................................................138
View address......................................................................................................................139
View variables ....................................................................................................................139
View address/variables ......................................................................................................140
View address/comment ......................................................................................................140

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xv


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

View variables/comments .................................................................................................. 140


Adjust number of contact point .......................................................................................... 141
LD view properties............................................................................................................. 142
6.5 Additional edit function...............................................................................143
Optimize program .............................................................................................................. 143
Block mask instruction ....................................................................................................... 144
Bookmark .......................................................................................................................... 145
Go to ................................................................................................................................. 148

7. SFC EDIT ................................................................................... 153


7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................153
7.2 SFC program limitations .............................................................................153
7.3 Program edit .................................................................................................154
Edit tools ........................................................................................................................... 154
Input step/transition ........................................................................................................... 155
Input action ........................................................................................................................ 157
Input block/transition ......................................................................................................... 158
Input label .......................................................................................................................... 158
Input jump ......................................................................................................................... 159
Create left branch .............................................................................................................. 160
Create right branch............................................................................................................ 162
Edit step property .............................................................................................................. 164
Transition property ............................................................................................................ 165
Action property .................................................................................................................. 166
Edit block property............................................................................................................. 168
Edit label property ............................................................................................................. 169
Jump property ................................................................................................................... 169
Set branch priority ............................................................................................................. 170
Erase branch priority ......................................................................................................... 171
Delete item ........................................................................................................................ 171
Copy/cut/paste .................................................................................................................. 172
Cut/paste ........................................................................................................................... 173
Undo and redo................................................................................................................... 173
Program edit mode ............................................................................................................ 175
7.4 View program ...............................................................................................175
Program zoom in/out ......................................................................................................... 175
SFC property ..................................................................................................................... 175
View block/action/transition list .......................................................................................... 182
Open action/transition ....................................................................................................... 183
Address/variables .............................................................................................................. 183
Address/comments............................................................................................................ 183
Adjust contact number ....................................................................................................... 184

xvi SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions

7.5 Edit additional function .............................................................................. 185


Bookmark setting ...............................................................................................................185
Go to ..................................................................................................................................185

8. PROGRAMMING ........................................................................187
8.1 Cross reference ........................................................................................... 187
View all addresses .............................................................................................................187
Data sorting ........................................................................................................................188
Output cross reference instantly.........................................................................................189
Check duplicate coil instantly .............................................................................................190
8.2 Used address ............................................................................................... 191
Viewing used address ........................................................................................................191
View address uses .............................................................................................................192
8.3 Check program ............................................................................................ 193
Check program setting .......................................................................................................193
Check result trace ..............................................................................................................195
Logic error ..........................................................................................................................195
Grammar error ...................................................................................................................200

9. FIND/REPLACE .........................................................................213
9.1 Find address ................................................................................................ 213
Find next address ...............................................................................................................214
Find all address ..................................................................................................................215
9.2 Find text ....................................................................................................... 216
Finding text.........................................................................................................................216
Find all text .........................................................................................................................218
9.3 Address replacement .................................................................................. 219
Replace address ................................................................................................................219
Replace all addresses ........................................................................................................221
9.4 Text replacement ......................................................................................... 223
Replace text string .............................................................................................................223
Replace all string ................................................................................................................225
9.5 Find again .................................................................................................... 225

10. PARAMETERS ...........................................................................227


10.1 Basic parameter ....................................................................................... 227
Basic parameter setting .....................................................................................................227

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xvii


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

10.2 I/O parameters ..........................................................................................232


Setting I/O parameters ...................................................................................................... 232
Base module setup............................................................................................................ 234
Module information setting based on slots ........................................................................ 235
I/O parameter edit function ................................................................................................ 235
Detailed module information setting .................................................................................. 237
I/O parameter print function ............................................................................................... 245

11. ONLINE...................................................................................... 247


11.1 Connection options for the PLC .............................................................247
Local connection setting .................................................................................................... 247
Using the local RS-232C ................................................................................................... 248
Using the local USB .......................................................................................................... 249
Remote 1 connect setting .................................................................................................. 249
Remote 2 connect setting .................................................................................................. 251
11.2 Online functions .......................................................................................252
Connect ............................................................................................................................. 252
Write .................................................................................................................................. 254
Read .................................................................................................................................. 255
Change mode .................................................................................................................... 255
Compare with PLC ............................................................................................................ 256
Reset PLC ......................................................................................................................... 257
Clearing PLC data ............................................................................................................. 257
PLC information................................................................................................................. 258
Password .......................................................................................................................... 259
PLC history ........................................................................................................................ 262
PLC error/warning ............................................................................................................. 265
Flash memory setting ........................................................................................................ 265
Force I/O setting ................................................................................................................ 266
Force I/O setting ................................................................................................................ 268
Forced I/O cancel .............................................................................................................. 269
Skip I/O setting .................................................................................................................. 270
Fault mask ......................................................................................................................... 273
11.3 Module changing wizard .........................................................................275

12. MONITORING ............................................................................ 279


12.1 Monitoring .................................................................................................279
Start/stop monitoring ......................................................................................................... 279
Change current value ........................................................................................................ 279
Pause/restart monitoring ................................................................................................... 281
Pausing conditions ............................................................................................................ 282
12.2 LD program monitoring ...........................................................................284
xviii SoftMaster User's Guide R200
Honeywell January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions

Start/stop monitoring ..........................................................................................................285


12.3 Variable monitoring ................................................................................. 286
Registering variable/comment ............................................................................................287
Register all .........................................................................................................................288
Register by user .................................................................................................................289
Drag and drop register from other windows .......................................................................289
View detailed/briefly ...........................................................................................................291
Monitoring operations .........................................................................................................294
Find ....................................................................................................................................295
Print ....................................................................................................................................295
Alignment ...........................................................................................................................295
12.4 System monitoring .................................................................................. 296
Basic application ................................................................................................................296
Connect/disconnect ............................................................................................................298
System synchronization .....................................................................................................298
All I/O modules ON/OFF ....................................................................................................299
Selected I/O modules ON/OFF ..........................................................................................299
Change current value .........................................................................................................300
Information display of power module ..................................................................................300
Information display of CPU module ....................................................................................301
Information display of communication module ...................................................................302
Viewing information of special modules .............................................................................302
Start/stop monitoring ..........................................................................................................303
Special module monitoring .................................................................................................303
Save ...................................................................................................................................304
Open ..................................................................................................................................304
Navigate base ....................................................................................................................305
Print preview ......................................................................................................................305
12.5 Address monitoring ................................................................................ 306
Basic application ................................................................................................................306
Address areas ....................................................................................................................307
Data format and display items ............................................................................................307
Edit data .............................................................................................................................308
Save address .....................................................................................................................309
Open address.....................................................................................................................309
Data value setting ..............................................................................................................310
Clear data...........................................................................................................................311
Write to PLC .......................................................................................................................311
Read from PLC ..................................................................................................................312
Write selected area on PLC ...............................................................................................313
Start/stop monitoring ..........................................................................................................313
Change current value .........................................................................................................314
PLC type settings ...............................................................................................................315
Screen zoom-in/zoom-out ..................................................................................................315
Automatic width/height adjustment .....................................................................................315

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xix


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

View properties.................................................................................................................. 316


Page setting ...................................................................................................................... 316
12.6 Special module monitoring .....................................................................317
12.7 Trend monitoring .....................................................................................318
Configuring trend monitoring ............................................................................................. 318
Start trend monitoring ........................................................................................................ 320
Setting trend graph ............................................................................................................ 322
Setting graph ..................................................................................................................... 323
Setting graph window ........................................................................................................ 325
Graph function ................................................................................................................... 326
Scroll synchronization ....................................................................................................... 326
12.8 Data traces ................................................................................................330
Connecting to PLC ............................................................................................................ 332
Trace setting...................................................................................................................... 332
Graph settings ................................................................................................................... 335
Trace ................................................................................................................................. 337
Animation .......................................................................................................................... 338
Graph function ................................................................................................................... 339
File function ....................................................................................................................... 339
View function ..................................................................................................................... 341
12.9 Custom events .........................................................................................343
Overview of custom events ............................................................................................... 343
Event setting...................................................................................................................... 344
Adding custom event item ................................................................................................. 345
Event history...................................................................................................................... 350

13. DEBUGGING ............................................................................. 355


13.1 Start/stop debugging ...............................................................................355
Start debugging ................................................................................................................. 355
Stop debugging ................................................................................................................. 355
13.2 LD program debugging ...........................................................................356
Set remove breakpoints .................................................................................................... 356
Go ..................................................................................................................................... 357
Go to cursor....................................................................................................................... 358
Step into, step out and step over functions ....................................................................... 359
13.3 List of break points ..................................................................................362
13.4 Variable break ...........................................................................................363
Setting variable break ........................................................................................................ 363
13.5 Scan break ................................................................................................365
Scan break run .................................................................................................................. 366

xx SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions

14. ONLINE EDITING .......................................................................367


14.1 Online editing sequence ......................................................................... 367
Open project.......................................................................................................................368
Connect ..............................................................................................................................368
Start monitoring ..................................................................................................................368
Start online editing .............................................................................................................368
Edit .....................................................................................................................................369
Write modified program ......................................................................................................369
End online editing ...............................................................................................................369

15. PRINTING...................................................................................371
15.1 Print project.............................................................................................. 371
Printing a project ................................................................................................................371
Print setting ........................................................................................................................372
Page setup .........................................................................................................................372
Header/footer setting ..........................................................................................................374
Cover setup ........................................................................................................................375
15.2 LD program print ..................................................................................... 378
Print setting ........................................................................................................................378
Print preview ......................................................................................................................380

16. USER FUNCTION/FUNCTION BLOCK .....................................381


16.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 381
16.2 Create user function/function block ...................................................... 382
16.3 Create user function/function block I/O variable ................................. 383
16.4 User function/function block programming ......................................... 384
16.5 Working with user function/function block .......................................... 386

17. SOFTMASTER SIMULATOR .....................................................387


17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) ......................................... 387
Features of SoftMaster-SIM ...............................................................................................387
System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM ......................................................387
Starting SoftMaster-SIM .....................................................................................................388
17.2 Program window configuration.............................................................. 391
Configuring the program window........................................................................................391
Channel list ........................................................................................................................392
Channel monitor .................................................................................................................393

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xxi


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

I/O condition ...................................................................................................................... 394


I/O condition monitor ......................................................................................................... 406
Module simulation ............................................................................................................. 407
Digital I/O module .............................................................................................................. 409
Analog output module (D/A conversion module) ............................................................... 410
High-speed counter module (HSC Module) ....................................................................... 412
RTD module ...................................................................................................................... 413
Advanced positioning module (APM module) .................................................................... 414
17.3 Limitations ................................................................................................421
Watchdog timer ................................................................................................................. 421
Communication module ..................................................................................................... 421

18. ST EDITION ............................................................................... 423


18.1 Writing ST program..................................................................................423
Adding scan program ........................................................................................................ 423
Adding user function/function block ................................................................................... 423
Adding SFC transition, action ............................................................................................ 423
18.2 Limit ...........................................................................................................425
18.3 Editing program .......................................................................................425
Shortcut keys..................................................................................................................... 425
Copy/paste ........................................................................................................................ 426
Undo/redo ......................................................................................................................... 426
Adding/selecting variable .................................................................................................. 427
Inserting function/function block ........................................................................................ 428
18.4 Viewing program ......................................................................................430
ST option ........................................................................................................................... 430
Font/color .......................................................................................................................... 431
Zoom ................................................................................................................................. 431
Tab .................................................................................................................................... 431
Showing line numbers ....................................................................................................... 432
18.5 Additional edit functions .........................................................................433
Book mark ......................................................................................................................... 433
Selection from character string list .................................................................................... 434
Selecting member variable from character string list ......................................................... 436
Setting/removing block mask ............................................................................................ 436
Setting/removing line block mask ...................................................................................... 438
Indent/outdent ................................................................................................................... 439

19. EVENT INPUT MODULE ........................................................... 441


19.1 Overview ...................................................................................................441

xxii SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions

Characteristics of SOE monitor ..........................................................................................441


Functions of the SOE monitor ............................................................................................441
Files created in the SOE monitor .......................................................................................442
19.2 Screen configuration............................................................................... 442
Menu structure ...................................................................................................................443
Tools ..................................................................................................................................445
SOE event history window .................................................................................................446
Status bar ...........................................................................................................................446
19.3 Basic parameter setting .......................................................................... 447
Setting items ......................................................................................................................447
19.4 I/O parameter setting ............................................................................... 447
Setting item ........................................................................................................................447
Chatter setting ....................................................................................................................450
19.5 View module information ........................................................................ 452
19.6 Event history monitor ............................................................................. 452
Example of event filter ........................................................................................................454
Prioritizing events ..............................................................................................................454
Comparing events ..............................................................................................................456
Deleting event history .........................................................................................................456
19.7 Save as an excel file ................................................................................ 457

20. DEDICATED ML200R FUNCTION .............................................459


20.1 Redundancy parameter........................................................................... 459
20.2 Redundancy PLC state window ............................................................. 462
20.3 Control redundancy ................................................................................ 463
Change of master CPU ......................................................................................................463
Standby CPU control ..........................................................................................................464
20.4 System monitoring .................................................................................. 465
System configuration .........................................................................................................465
Node count change ............................................................................................................466
Base information ...............................................................................................................467
Base changing wizard ........................................................................................................470

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xxiii


January 2011 Honeywell
Contents
Symbol Definitions

xxiv SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
1. Introduction
1.1 Features of SoftMaster
SoftMaster is a software tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC
series. Following are some of the key features of SoftMaster.
• Multi-PLC, Multi-Program
• Edit, monitor, and manage ML200 PLCs included in a project.
• Enables multiple scan programs and task programs
• Drag and Drop option
• Easy and convenient editing with Drag and Drop function on most editors such
as Project, Variable/Comment, LD Edit, Variable Monitor, and so on.
• Shortcut Keys
• The default shortcut keys provided are customizable.
• Message Windows
• Different message windows to edit and check programs.
• Convenient Variable/Comment Editing
• Option to edit using MS Excel.
• Edit option is available through View Variable, View Address, and View Flag.
• Auto-fill function to fill similar Variables
• Drag and Drop option on the Variable/Comment Windows.
• Convenient Program Edit
• Unlimited Undo/Redo function.
• Block Edit available in cell.
• Independent screen-level edit.
• Enhanced Find/Replace function.
• Block Mask function to prohibit execution in rung.
• Bookmark function for access to a specific location in a LD program.
R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 25
January 2011 Honeywell
1. Introduction
1.1. Features of SoftMaster

• Allows reference to memory of selected address when editing LD.


• Monitoring Functions
• Monitoring functions for variable monitoring, address monitoring, system
monitoring, trend monitoring, special module monitoring.
• Custom Events
• Logging and reading data available if user-defined conditions are met for a
specific address.
• Module Changing Wizard
• Easy and safe change of module during PLC RUN.

26 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
1. Introduction
1.2. System requirements

1.2 System requirements


The following are the system requirements of SoftMaster.
Item Specification

Personal computer and memory A Pentium computer and 128MB memory

COM port RS-232C serial port or USB port

Hard disk At least 100MB or more space.

Monitor Monitor should have 1024 x 768 and higher


resolution

Operating System Compatible with Windows XP/Vista/7

ATTENTION
It is recommended to install SoftMaster on Windows XP or Windows Vista or
Windows 7.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 27


January 2011 Honeywell
1. Introduction
1.2. System requirements

28 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
2. Installation
2.1 Installing SoftMaster
To install SoftMaster, perform the following steps:

Step Action
1 Double-click the SoftMaster.exe file from the location to execute the
installation.

Installation wizard displays and prepares for installation.

2 Click Next. The Customer Information page appears.


3 Type the User Name and name of the Organization.
4 Click Next. The Destination Folder page appears.

In this page, you can either install in default location or specify the location to
install SoftMaster. Click Change to install in different location. You can
browse and select the required location.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 29


January 2011 Honeywell
2. Installation
2.1. Installing SoftMaster

Step Action
5 Click Next. The Ready to Install Program page displays.

Note: SoftMaster needs 30 MB of free disk space. In case of inadequate free


space, you are prompted to select a disk with enough capacity.
6 Click Install to begin installation. The status bar displays the progress of the
installation.

All the program features selected are installed. Once the SoftMaster is
successfully installed, the InstallShield Wizard Completed page displays.

7 Click Finish to exit from the wizard.

30 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
2. Installation
2.2. Installing the USB device driver

2.2 Installing the USB device driver


If you are installing SoftMaster, you may need to install the USB device driver
separately.
Perform the following steps to install USB Device driver.

ATTENTION
When you install a SoftMaster, a Drivers sub-folder is created under the
folder where SoftMaster is installed and there are two driver files,
GmUSBD.sys and GmUSBD.inf in the Drivers folder. If there is no folder or
driver file, reinstall the SoftMaster.

Step Action
1 Turn PLC power ON and connect USB device to the PC.

If the connection is established, the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog


box appears.

2 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and then
click Next.

The Search and Installation page displays.


3 Select Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in
the search options.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 31


January 2011 Honeywell
2. Installation
2.2. Installing the USB device driver

Step Action
4 Click Browse. The Browse For Folder dialog box displays, select Drivers
folder where SoftMaster is installed.
5 Click OK. Then, the system searches for the driver files in the selected folder.
6 When the most suitable device driver is found, system prompts and begins to
install the selected device driver. Since, USB device driver operates stably
based on Windows OS, click Continue Anyway.

Once the device driver is installed completely, the Installation Complete


page displays.
7 Click Finish to exit from the wizard.

Verifying the USB device driver installation


If USB connection is not available, check the installation status of the device driver as
follows:

Step Action
1 On the desktop, right-click My Computer and click Manage.

The Computer Management window appears.


2 In the left pane, choose Computer Management (Local) > System Tools >
Device Manager. The items displayed in the right pane may be different
according to the devices installed on the computer.

32 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
2. Installation
2.2. Installing the USB device driver

Normal case
If the USB device driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is installed successfully, the
Honeywell MasterLogic Series item appears under Universal Serial Bus Controller as
shown in the following figure.

Abnormal case
If the device driver is not installed successfully, then the Honeywell MasterLogic Series
item does not appear under Universal Serial Bus Controller as shown in the following
figure.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 33


January 2011 Honeywell
2. Installation
2.2. Installing the USB device driver

If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, then reinstall
the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC using the following steps.

Step Action
1 Right-click the device driver item and click Update Driver from the context
menu.

2 The Found New Hardware Wizard displays.

Click Installation from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and


then click Next. Then, follow the same steps as in section Installing the USB
device driver.

34 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1 SoftMaster user interface
The following is an illustration of the SoftMaster user interface. The user interface of
SoftMaster can be described as follows:

UI area Description

A Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar of SoftMaster.

B Tool bar: The toolbar below the menu bar contains buttons and
commands to access frequently used tasks.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 35


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

UI area Description

C Project window: Displays the components of the currently open


project.

D Variable Monitoring window: Used to register and monitor


variables.

E Status bar: Display the status of SoftMaster, the information of the


connected PLC, and so on.

F Edit window: Displays the current Edit window.

G Message window: Displays messages when the SoftMaster is in


use.

Menu bar
Selecting a menu item displays the options under the menu. Click a menu item and select
an option from the drop-down list of menu options. You can also access the menu using
the shortcut keys.

Project
The following table lists the project menu options with their description:

Menu option Description

New Project Creates a new project.

Open Project Opens an existing project.

Open from PLC Uploads the project and program stored


in PLC.

Save Project Saves the project.

Save As Enables you to save the project with a


different name.

Close Project Closes the project.

Add Item PLC Adds a new PLC to the project.

Task Adds a new task program to the project.

Program Adds a new scan program to the project.

Function Adds a new function to the project.

36 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu option Description

Function Block Adds a new function block to the project.

Data type Adds a new data type to the project.

Import Item from PLC Imports the PLC program from the file.
File
Global Imports global variables/address from the
Variables/Address file.

Program Imports the program from the file.

I/O parameter Imports the I/O parameter from the file.

Basic parameter Imports the basic parameter from the file.

Function/FB… Imports the function/FB from the file.

Export to File Exports the selected item on the project


window into the file.

Save Variable Names to File Saves variable names to a file.

Compare Projects Compares two projects stored in the PC


and displays its result.

Print Prints the active window’s details.

Preview Displays a preview of the screen to be


printed.

Print Project Enables selection of a project item for


printing.

Print Setup Sets the printer options.

Exit Close the SoftMaster.

Edit
The following table lists the edit menu options with their description.

Menu option Description

Undo Cancels the edit on Program Edit


Window to recover its previous status.

Redo Recovers the edit cancelled using Undo.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 37


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu option Description

Cut Copies the selected block to clipboard


and deletes the block.

Copy Copies the selected block to the


clipboard.

Paste Copies from the clipboard and pastes on


the Edit window.

Delete Deletes the selected block or items.

Select All Selects all block in the currently active


window.

Insert Mode Changes program edit mode to insert


mode.

Insert Line Adds a new line to the cursor position.

Delete Line Deletes the line from the cursor position.

Insert Cell Adds a cell available to the cursor


position.

Delete Cell Deletes a cell from the cursor position.

Register Special/Communication Module Registers special module variables in


Variables global variables list and deletes previous
list.

Optimize Program Optimizes the program automatically.

Insert Comment/Label Inserts a comment or label in the cursor


position.

Set Block Mask Sets cursor-positioned rung or specified


block area block mask in rung unit.

Remove Block Mask Removes cursor-positioned rung or


specified block area set in block mask.

Bookmark Set/Remove Sets or removes a bookmark.

Remove All Cancels all the bookmarks specified.

Previous Bookmark Moves to the previous bookmark.

Next Bookmark Moves to the next bookmark.

38 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu option Description

Tools Edit tools for each program are available.

Find/replace
The following table lists the find/replace menu options with their description.

Menu Option Description

Find Address Finds variable address.

Find Text Searches for variable based on the


variable name.

Replace Address Replaces variable address with another


address.

Replace Text Replaces variable name with some other


text.

Find Again Searches again.

Go To Step/line Moves the cursor to the position of a


specific step/line.

Rung comment Moves the cursor to the position of a


specific rung comment.

Label Moves the cursor to the position of a


specific label.

END command Moves the cursor to the position of END


command.

Previous Message Moves from the current message window


to the previous message window.

Next Message Moves from the current message window


to the next message window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 39


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

View
The following table lists the view menu options with their description.

Menu Description

IL Converts to IL View during LD Edit.

Project Window Shows or hides the project window.

Message Window Shows or hides the message window.

Variable Monitoring Window Shows or hides the variable monitor


window.

Instruction Window Shows or hides the instruction window.

Cross Reference Displays the used-memory information


on the message window’s Cross
Reference tab.

Used Address Lists all the memory addresses which are


used in the program.

Check Program Checks the program and displays its


result on the message window’s Check
Program tab.

Variables Displays the variable name in the


program.

Address Indicates the memory address.

Flags Indicates default system defined flags.

Address/Variables Displays the address and the variable in


the program.

Address/Comments Displays the address and the comment in


the program.

Variables/Comments Displays the variable and the comment in


the program.

Zoom-In Magnifies the window.

Zoom-Out Reduces the window.

Resize Width Automatically adjusts the cell width to the


string width in the variable/comment
window.

40 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu Description

Resize Height Automatically adjusts the cell height


applicably to the string height in the LD or
variable/comment window.

Full Screen Enlarges the program window or


variable/comment window applicably to
the whole screen.

Properties Displays the registered information of the


selected item on the project window.

LD Properties Displays the LD properties in the


program.

Change Columns Increase or decrease the columns in the


program screen.

Open Local Variables Converts from the program screen to the


local variable screen.

Open User Function Opens the user-defined program.

Open Program Converts from the local variable screen


to the program screen.

Online
The following table lists the online menu options with their description.

Menu Description

Connect/Disconnect Connects or disconnects with PLC.

Connection Settings Specifies the connection method.

Change Mode Run Changes PLC mode.

Stop

Debug

Read Reads parameter/program/comment from PLC.

Write Writes parameter/program/comment on PLC.

Compare with PLC Compares the project to the project saved in


PLC.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 41


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu Description

Set Flash Memory Copies the program into PLC flash memory if
enabled.

Reset PLC Resets PLC.

Clear PLC Deletes parameter/program/comment saved in


PLC.

PLC Information Displays PLC information.

PLC History Displays PLC history.

PLC Errors/Warnings Displays PLC error/warning information.

I/O Information Displays PLC I/O information

Save PLC History Saves PLC history

Force I/O Displays the window for compulsory I/O


setting.

Skip I/O Displays the window for I/O skip setting.

Fault Mask Displays the window for fault mask setting.

Module Changing Wizard Displays the dialog window to change the


modules.

Base Changing Wizard Changes base while PLC is operating.

Start Online Editing Displays the dialog box to edit the program
online when the PLC is running.

Write Modified Program Displays the dialog box to download the edited
program online when the PLC is running. The
modified program gets activated online.

End Online Editing This ends the online editing session and the
program comes back to normal operation.

42 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Monitor
The following table lists the monitor menu options with their description.

Menu Description

Start/Stop Monitoring Starts or stops the monitor.

Pause Temporarily stops the monitor.

Resume Restarts the monitor temporarily stopped.

Pausing Conditions Specifies conditions for the monitor


temporary stop.

Change Current Value Specifies the address value being


monitored.

System Monitoring Executes the system monitor.

Address Monitoring Execute the address monitor window


which shows all memory area addresses.

Special Module Monitoring Executes the special module monitor.

Trend Monitoring Executes the trend monitor.

PID Monitoring Monitors all or individual PID block.

SOE Monitoring Monitors the events which are entered


into the CPU and the event input
modules.

Custom Events Specifies the custom events.

Data Traces Specifies the address to monitor the


change of the data.

Debug
The following table lists the debug menu options with their description.

Menu Description

Start/Stop Debugging Converts debug mode to Start/Stop


Debugging.

Go Runs to the break point.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 43


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu Description

Step Over Runs step by step.

Step Into Debugs the subroutine.

Step Out Escapes from the subroutine.

Go to Cursor Runs to the cursor position.

Set/Remove Breakpoints Sets or cancels the break point.

Breakpoints List Displays the list of the break points


specified.

Breakpoint Conditions Specifies the break conditions.

Tools
The following table lists the tools menu options with their description.

Menu Description

Network Manager Shows the PLC network and specifies


the parameter.

Start/End Simulator Starts or ends the simulator.

Customize Enables to set tools and options.

Shortcut Settings User specifies the shortcut keys.

Options Enables to customize the SoftMaster


environment as per the user preference.

Create Host ID This creates the host ID file. Host ID is


required to get the license.

Window
The following table lists the window menu options with their description.

Menu Description

New Window Opens a new window on the active


window.

Split Splits the Project window.

44 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Menu Description

Cascade Arranges the several windows of


SoftMaster in steps.

Tile Horizontally Arranges the several windows of


SoftMaster horizontally.

Tile Vertically Arranges the several windows of


SoftMaster vertically.

Arrange Icons Arranges the icons of SoftMaster.

Close All Closes all the windows of SoftMaster.

Help
The following table lists the help menu options with their description.
Instruction Description

SoftMaster Help Opens Help for SoftMaster application.

Instruction Help Opens Help for PLC instructions.

About SoftMaster Displays SoftMaster information.

Tool bar
SoftMaster provides shortcut icons for frequently used menus on the tool bar. Click the
required tool to execute.

Creating a custom tool bar


Perform the following steps to create a custom tool bar.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Customize.

The Customize dialog box displays.

Select the tool bars to show/hide.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 45


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.1. SoftMaster user interface

Step Action
2 Click New.

The New Toolbar dialog box displays.


3 Type a name for the new tool bar.
4 Click OK to create a tool bar with no tools.

Filling the tool box


This menu is used to populate the tool box created with custom tools. Perform the
following steps to fill the tool box.

Step Action
1 Select the Command tab on the Customize dialog box.
2 Select the menus that you want as a part of the new tool bar.
3 Click OK to create the new tool bar.

Status display line


As depicted in the following illustration, the Status Display line is used to display the
following:

Legend Description

Tool tip of Used to display the comment of the selected menu, instruction or
selected toolbar mouse-positioned tool box.
item

Name of the Indicates the name of the selected PLC name. If a project has
PLC several PLCs, online-related instructions are applied to the PLC
displayed here (Example: New PLC).

PLC Mode Used to display the PLC mode. If several PLCs are in a project,
display the selected PLC’s mode is displayed (Example: Run).

46 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.2. Edit functions

Legend Description

Warning Display Indicates the error status in the PLC (Example: R1, Ethernet,
OK).

Cursor Position Indicates the cursor position when a program is edited (Example:
Row 9, Column 5).

Mode Indicates the insert mode or overwrite mode.

Change view window


All the windows (such as project window, result window, and so on.) available in view
menu are composed of docking windows. Use the mouse to adjust the position and the
size of the windows or to hide the windows.

Change to open window


Right-click the window and choose Float In Main Window from the context menu.

Hide
Right-click on a window and choose Hide from the context menu.

3.2 Edit functions


These functions are available in LD, IL, Variable/Comment, Variable Monitor, and
Project Window. Variable/Comment and Excel can share the edited details with each
other.

Cut–paste
Cut > Paste menu is used to move the data of the selected area to a new position to paste
the data on.

Copy–paste
Copy > Paste menu is used to create data identical to the data of the selected area. In
case the variable name is duplicated as described in Variable/Comment, an applicable
warning message appears. For more details refer to the comment of each edit window.

Drag and drop


Drag and Drop is used to apply either Cut > Paste or Copy > Paste. When dragging and
dropping in a same area such as same LD or IL window, it applies Cut > Paste; if

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 47


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.3. Shortcut keys

dragging and dropping with two and more SoftMaster Program instances opened, it
applies Copy > Paste.

TIP
− Cut, Copy and Paste can be also controlled by the context menu in Edit
window.
− Copy/Paste in Variable/Comment or LD/IL Edit is verified for the duplication
by the program. However, it should be also checked manually by a user.
− Program does not respond if Cut, Copy or Paste is operated in an
unavailable area.
− Cut, Copy or Paste from/to different areas may cause fatal program errors.

− Auto conversion function is not provided when Cut, Copy or Paste is


attempted from/to different areas. Therefore, a user should check the
pasted area.

Zooming in/zooming out


This function is used for magnifying or reducing the edit window. The applicable
magnification rate changes by a minimum of 5% within the range of 50% ~ 200%.
To zoom-in/zoom-out, select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out on the menu as
necessary or use the combo box to select or enter a specific magnification rate or press
Ctrl and use the mouse wheel to adjust magnification rate.

48 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.3. Shortcut keys

3.3 Shortcut keys


Configuring shortcut keys
Shortcut keys can be specified for all the instructions. When you set new shortcut keys
for a task the existing shortcut key is deleted.
Perform the following steps to set the shortcut key for an instruction:

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Shortcut Settings. The Shortcut Keys window displays.

Field Label Description

Select a macro Used to select the menu to specify its


shortcut key on the list.

Create Shortcut Used to create a shortcut key for the selected


menu.

Remove Deletes the specified shortcut key.

Reset All Deletes all the shortcut keys specified and


resets all to default.
2 From the Select a macro list, select the menu to specify its shortcut key.
3 Click Create Shortcut. The Assign Shortcut window displays.
4 Set the shortcut key. For example, to apply Alt + Z, press Alt and Z on the
keyboard. A shortcut key is displayed on the Edit Window. If this key
association is already used, a menu applicable to the specified shortcut key is
displayed.
5 Click OK to save the shortcut.

Shortcut keys

Shortcut Keys Comment

Home Used to move to the starting point in the row.

End Used to move to the end of the row.

Ctrl + Home Used to move to the first cell position.

Ctrl + End Used to move to the last cell position.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 49


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.3. Shortcut keys

Shortcut Keys Comment

Shift + Ctrl + Home To select from the current to the previous cells.

Shift + Ctrl + End To select from the current to the last cells.

Shift + Page Up To select from the cell to the page up position.

Shift + Page Down To select from the cell to the page down position.

Shift + Tab, Used to move to the next cell (right->left, bottom->top),


Shift + Enter and to move to the last cell in the first row.

Tab, Enter Used to move to the next cell (left->right, top->bottom).


A new line is created after the last row.

Ctrl + Enter Multi-line is entered in the comment column.

50 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

3.4 Customizing SoftMaster


This function enables you to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a
common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST.

1 2

1. Category: Enables to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a
common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST.
2. Contents: If you select a particular category, it displays contents for the
corresponding category.
3. Buttons: These buttons are used to apply the setting, cancel the setting, to reset all
the setting, and to exit from options window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 51


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Configuring SoftMaster options


Perform the following steps to configure custom options for SoftMaster.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select SoftMaster in the Option window.

The following table provides a brief description of SoftMaster settings.

Field Label Description

Default folder for new Location where the new project is created.
projects By default, the location is C:\SoftMaster\.
You can also set the location where the
new project has to be created.

Select Folder Searches the required folder where the


new project has to be created.

Number of backup file(s) Sets the backup file number to restore the
project file. You can set up to a maximum
of 20.

Number of recent projects to Sets the number of recently opened


display project file. You can set up to a maximum
of 20. Click Project > Recent Project to
view the recently opened projects.

Open previous project when If you select this option, SoftMaster


starting the SoftMaster. automatically opens the last file used
when SoftMaster starts.

Integrated connection and If you select this option, when executing


file with SoftMaster-NM SoftMaster-NM through SoftMaster menu,
make a connection option of SoftMaster
and PLC name displayed at SoftMaster-
NM.
3 Click OK.

52 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Setting common editor


Perform the following steps to display the common editor.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Common Editor in the Option window and select the options you
want to change.

The following table provides a brief description of common editor settings.

Field Label Description

Output cross If you select this option then when editing the
reference instantly LD program, displays automatically the cross
reference contents for the selected address.
When this option is not selected, select View >
Cross Reference and check the memory
usage result.

Check duplicated coil If you select this option it checks the duplicated
instantly coils during editing and displays it in the result
window.

Instant input mode If you select this option then when the user
enters some contact, the address input window
for the user to enter the address displays.
When this option is not selected, then the user
double-clicks the contact or presses Enter with
cursor on the contact to edit it.

Show line numbers Displays line number.

Show grid Displays grid.


3 Click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 53


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

SoftMaster font/color option


This option enables to change font/color used in the editing window. You can also set the
font color for LD, SFC, and ST.
Perform the following steps to change the font/color.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Font/Color in the Option window and select the options you want to
change.

The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings.

Field Label Description

Items The items that you want to change the


font/color.

Font It is activated when the item is Text font. It


designates text font.

Color It is activated when item is not Text font. It


designates color.

Default Restore the default value.

Preview Displays the current setting status.


3 Click OK.

SoftMaster online option


This option enables you to specify the SoftMaster online-related options.
Perform the following steps to specify the online-related options.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Online in the Option window.

Type: Sets monitor display type of data value.

Example: If you select hexadecimal, variable is displayed as hexadecimal


number when monitoring.

54 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

Type Example function block ADD

Unsigned
decimal

Signed
decimal

Hexadecimal -

As instruction

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 55


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

As variable

View connection settings when connecting: Display automatically the


specified details of the connection with PLC when connected. If you select
this option then the following dialog box appears whenever PLC is connected.

Show Message when changing the PLC mode: When changing the PLC,
select this option to display the conversion message automatically. When
changing stop mode to run mode, the following message displays.

Contrary, when changing run mode to stop mode, the following message
displays.

56 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

Configuring LD option
This option enables you to can change text and column width of LD editor.
Perform the following steps to display the LD option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select LD from the Options window.

The following table provides a brief description of LD settings.

Field Label Description

Display above text When displaying text above diagram, you


can decide whether to display height of
text as variable type according to the
number of character or as fixed type
according to setting.

Display below text When displaying text below diagram, you


can decide whether to display height of
text as variable type according to the
number of character or as fixed type
according to setting.

Display Specified column width of LD diagram.


3 Click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 57


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

LD font/color option
This option enables you to can change the Font/Color used in LD editor.
Perform the following steps, to set the LD font/color option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Font/Color in LD category and select the options you want to change.

The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings.

Field Label Description

Items The items that you want to change the


font/color.

Font It is activated when the item is Text font. It


designates text font.

Color It is activated when item is not Text font. It


designates color.

Default Restores the default value for the selected


item.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected


item.
3 Click OK.

Configuring SFC option


This option is used when editing SFC program.
Perform the following steps to display the SFC option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select SFC from the Options window.

58 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

The following table provides a brief description of SFC settings.

Field Label Description

Show comment Shows comment of step, transition, action


and block.

Show print area Shows printable area with the thick dotted
line.

Show page number Shows page number in printable area

Step column width Specifies column width of step, transition.

Action column width Specifies column width of action.

Utilize SFC split window You can use SFC split window.

Split window position Decides split widow position.

Split window contents Decides which content to display.

ATTENTION
• Range of step column width is 20~200.
• Range of action column width is 70~400.
3 Click OK.

SFC font/color option


This option enables you to change font/color used in SFC editor.
Perform the following steps to set the SFC font/color option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Font/Color in SFC category and select the options you want to
change.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 59


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings.

Field Label Description

Items The items that you want to change the


font/color.

Font It is activated when the item is Text font. It


designates text font.

Color It is activated when item is not Text font. It


designates color.

Default Restores default value for selected item.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected


item.
3 Click OK.

Configuring ST option
This option is used in editing ST program.
Perform the following steps to display the ST option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select ST from the Options window.

The following table provides a brief description of ST settings.

Field Label Description

Parameter information Provides parameter information, exclusive


of 2MLK CPU.

Auto list members When you enter character with keyboard,


it shows instruction and variable starting
with the entered character.

Auto macro statement When you enter control statement such as


IF, WHILE, SWITCH and press Enter, it
completes the statement according to ST
grammar.

60 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

Step Action

Tab size Specifies space length when you press


Tab key.

Auto indent When you change line with Enter key, it


indents automatically as many as previous
tab size.

Enhance Shows character string with diverse color


according to variable, reserved word,
comment, and instruction.
3 Click OK.

ST font/color option
This option enables you to can change Font/Color used in ST editor.
Perform the following steps, to set the ST font/color option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select Font/Color in ST category and select the options you want to change.

The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings.

Field Label Description

Items The items that you want to change the


font/color

Font It is activated when the item is Text font. It


designates text font.

Color It is activated when item is not Text font. It


designates color.

Default Restore default value for selected item.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected


item.
3 Click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 61


January 2011 Honeywell
3. Basic application
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster

62 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.1 Overview of project configuration
Project configuration window
The following are the components of the project configuration window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 63


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.1. Overview of project configuration

Legend Item Name Description

a Project Used to specify the whole system. Several


related PLCs can be included in one project.

b PLC Displays the system applicable to a CPU


module.

c Global/Direct Variables Global variable declaration and direct variable


text can be edited and viewed.

d Parameter Used to specify the details on operation and


configuration of PLC system.

e Basic Parameters Used to specify the basic operation.

f I/O Parameters Used to specify the I/O module configuration.

g User Data type Defines the structure type.

h Scan Program Used as the folder for all the programs.

i New program Folder for local variables and user written scan
programs.

j Scan Program 2 Folder for local variables and user written scan
programs.

k Task1 User-defined task with a fixed cycle.

l Task Program1 Folder for local variables and user written task
programs.

m User function/function Custom function/function block created by the


block user.

n Function1 Folder for local variables and user written


functions.

TIP
A project can include several PLCs. This way, SoftMaster can be used to
conveniently manage and monitor several PLCs simultaneously.

64 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.2. Project management

4.2 Project management


Creating a new project
This option enables you to create a new project. A folder with a name identical to the
project name is created and the project file is saved in this folder.

Step Action
1 Click Project > New Project. The New Project window displays.

The following table provides a brief description about New Project window
fields.

Field Label Description

Project name You can enter the project name, which is the
name of the project file. The extension of the
project file is ‘xgp’.

File directory A folder with the name identical to the project


name as specified by the user when created
and the project file is stored in this folder.

Select Folder Browse to select a folder to store the project


file.

PLC series Select ML-200, ML-50, ML-200 IEC, or ML-


200R as the PLC type.

CPU type Select the type of CPU

Program name Enter the name of a program included in the


project.

Program language Select the program language as LD, SFC, or


ST.

Project description Enter a description for the project.

TIP
When you create a new project, it is stored in a folder with a name that is
identical to the project name. The extension of ‘.xgp’ is automatically attached
to the project file if it is not specified.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 65


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.2. Project management

Opening the project


Perform the following steps to open an existing project.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Open Project. The Open dialog box displays.
2 Select a Project and click Open.

Note: When you select a project, the user-defined comment appears in the
comment section of the dialog box. This helps in selecting projects.

Opening a project from PLC


This option enables you to create a new project, by reading the project stored in PLC. If
the project is already open in SoftMaster, the project is closed to create a new project.
Perform the following steps to create a new project.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Open from PLC. The Online Settings window displays.
2 Select an object to connect and click OK.

For details on connection settings, refer to Connect Options in Online


functions.
3 A new project is created.

TIP
• Click Project > Save Project to save the project read from the PLC in
the PC.

• Click Online > Read to read the items of PLC and to import to the
currently open Project.

Saving a project
This option enables you to save changes in a project.
To save a Project, on the menu bar, click Project > Save Project.

66 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

TIP
If items in the project have changed and need to be saved, “*” displays
beside the project name in the Project Window.

Saving project as
This option enables you to save the project in a different file name.
Perform the following steps to save the project, with a different file name:

Step Action
1 Click Project > Save As. The Save As window displays.
2 Enter a new project file name and select a folder, where you want to save the
project file.

The following table provides a brief description about Save As window fields.

Field Label Description

File name You can enter the name of the project. The
project file is stored in this name. The extension
of the project file is ‘.xgp’.

File directory The last saved file path displays for saving the
current file. In case you save it for first time, the
default folder name displays which is identical to
the name of the project.

Select Folder Browse to select a folder to store the project file.


3 Click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 67


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

4.3 Project item


Add item
You can add a PLC, task, and program into the project.
Perform the following steps to add PLC.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the Project Item.

2 Click Project > Add Item >PLC. The PLC window displays.
3 Type the PLC name and PLC description and select PLC type from the drop-
down list. Click OK to create a new PLC.

TIP
SoftMaster allows the user to specify the project and to include several PLCs
in one project for convenient program management.

68 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Add task
Perform the following steps to add a task.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the PLC Item.

2 Click Project > Add Item > Task. The Task window displays.
3 Type the Task name, Task number and select Priority, Execution Condition.
Click OK to create a new Task.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 69


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Step Action

The following table provides a brief description about Task window fields.

Field Label Description

Task name You can enter the name of the task. The
name must not include special
characters.

Priority Used to specify the priority of the tasks.


A lower figure indicates a higher priority.
Lower the figure, higher is the priority.

Task number It is a unique number used to identify


and manage the tasks in PLC. The Task
number can change based on the
Execution condition (For Example, Fixed
Cycle: 0 ~ 31)

Execution condition Used to specify the execution condition


under which the task is executed.

Internal address execution Setting items are different according to


condition the type of internal address.

Address Used to enter the address which is used


as the start condition of task program.
Enter BIT or WORD address according
to the condition to execute the task
program.

Word address start condition The start condition is specified if WORD


type of the internal address start
condition is selected.

Bit address start condition The start condition is specified if BIT type
of the internal address start condition is
selected.

70 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

TIP
Execution condition may be different according to the PLC type.
− Initialization: The initialization task is executed when the PLC mode
is changed from STOP to RUN. It is executed until the _INIT_DONE
(F10250) Flag is ON. And while the initialization task is executed, the
programs (including the Scan Program) which belong to other tasks
is not executed.
− Fixed Cycle: The task is executed at the specified intervals of time.
Enter the time in ms unit.
− External contact point: The task is executed if specified external
contact point is ON. The relative external address should be entered.
For example, %P00016.
− Internal address: The task is executed based on the status of
internal address. The setup item is different according to the type of
internal address.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the operation and details of the task, see 2MLK
CPU manual.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 71


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Adding a program
Perform the following steps to add a Program.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program
can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.

2 Click Project > Add Item > Program. The Program window displays.
3 Type the Program Name, Program Description, and select language. Click
OK to create a program.

Exporting to file
The following items can be saved as separate item files.
Item File Extension

PLC plc

Global/direct variables gdv

I/O parameter iop

Basic parameter bsp

Program prg

Use function/function block fun

72 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Exporting PLC configuration


Perform the following steps to export a PLC.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item.

2 Click Project > Export to File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays.
3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

Exporting variable/comment
Perform the following steps to export a variable/comment.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item.
2 Click Project > Export to File > Variable/Comment. The Open dialog box
displays.
3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 73


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Exporting I/O parameters


Perform the following steps to export I/O parameters.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item.
2 Click Project > Export to File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog box
displays.
3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

Exporting basic parameters


Perform the following steps to export basic parameters.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item.
2 Click Project > Export to File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog box
displays.
3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

Exporting a program
Perform the following steps to export a program.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the program item.
2 Click Project > Export to File > Program. The Open dialog box displays.
3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

TIP
− Items can be easily copied or moved between the projects using the
Drag and Drop function.
− Drag and Drop function is available between projects, when two
SoftMaster projects are open.

74 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Importing from file


The following components can be saved as separate files and can be replaced by saved
files.

Item File extension

PLC plc

Global/direct variables gdv

I/O parameter iop

Basic parameter bsp

Program prg

User function/function block fun

Imports item from saved item files. The contents from PLC, program is inserted into the
project. Variable/comment, basic parameter, I/O parameter, and so on is overwritten on
the previous item.

TIP
Since variable/comment, basic parameters, and I/O parameters are
overwritten on the existing items; the content of the existing item is deleted.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 75


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Importing a PLC CPU configuration


Perform the following steps to import a PLC CPU configuration.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item.

2 Click Project > Import Item from File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays.
3 Select the file and then click OK.

Importing variable/comment
Perform the following steps to import variable/comment.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item.
2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Global Variables/Address. The
Open dialog box displays.
3 Select the file and then click OK.

76 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Importing I/O parameter


Perform the following steps to import an I/O parameter.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item.
2 Click Project > Import Item from File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog
box displays.
3 Select the file and click OK.

Importing basic parameter


Perform the following steps to import basic parameter.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item.
2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog
box displays.
3 Select the file and then click OK.

Importing a program
Perform the following steps to import a program,

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program
can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.
2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Program. The Open dialog box
displays.
3 Select the file and then click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 77


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Project properties
Perform the following steps to view the project properties,

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the Project item.
2 Click View > Properties. The item window displays.

The following table provides a brief description about the fields.

Field Label Description

Project name Displays the project name, which


can be changed as necessary.

Project description Displays the project description,


which can be changed as
necessary.

File name Displays the file name where the


project is saved. To save as a
different file: click Project > Save
As.
3 After the change, click OK.

78 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Viewing/editing changing PLC properties


Perform the following steps to view the properties of a PLC.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item.
2 Click View > Properties. The PLC window displays.
3 Make the required changes and click OK.

Viewing/editing task properties


Perform the following steps to view task properties.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select a task item.
2 Click View > Properties. The Task window displays.
3 Make the required changes and click OK.

Viewing/editing program information


Perform the following steps to view Program properties.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select a program item.
2 Click View > Properties. The Program window displays.
3 Make the required changes and click OK.

Changing program execution sequence


Scan and Task program is executed from the priority in regular sequence.
Thus, the program location is changed to alter the execution sequence.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 79


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.3. Project item

Changing the order of execution


Perform the following steps to change the order of execution.

Step Action
1 Select a program.
2 Right-click on the selected program and select Move Up (Program) or Move
Down (Program) from the context menu.

Comparing projects
Two projects can be compared with respect to specific items. The Result window
displays the compared results.
Perform the following steps to compare two projects.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Compare Projects. The Compare Projects window
displays.
2 In the Compare Projects window, click Open Project.

3 Select the project file to compare.


4 Select the items to compare with. The selected items of both projects should
be identical.
5 Click Compare. The Result window displays the compared results.

80 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.4. Project password

4.4 Project password


Setting project password
You can specify the password for a project file. This function prevents other users from
opening the project file. This project file password bears no relation with the PLC
password. Password can have a maximum of 8 characters.

ATTENTION
You will not be able to open the project file if you forget the password.

Perform the following steps to set a password for a project.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the Project.

2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays.


3 In the Project window, select the Password tab.
4 Enter the password in the Password field in the New password section.
5 Re-enter the password in Confirm password field.
6 Click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 81


January 2011 Honeywell
4. Project Configuration
4.4. Project password

Changing password
Perform the following steps to change password.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the Project.
2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays.
3 In the Project window, select the Password tab.
4 Enter the previous password in Password field in the Previous password
section.
5 Enter the new password in Password field in the New password section.
6 Re-enter the password in Confirm password field.
7 Click OK.

Deleting password
Perform the following steps to delete password.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, select the Project.
2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays.
3 In the Project window, select the Password tab.
4 Enter the password in Password field.
5 Click Delete button to delete the password.

82 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.1 Overview of variables
Use of variables is program dependent. In general, global variable is available in every
program. To use a global variable as a local variable, it is necessary to declare it as
EXTERN before use. Local variable is available only in a designated program. Direct
variable (variables with user specified address) can be used in the program. In addition, a
comment can be entered to the direct variable.

5.2 Global/direct variable


Global/direct variables consist of global variables, direct variable comments, and flags. A
global variable declares the variable to be used for a program or displays a list of the
declared variables, based on the available variables. Direct variable comment declares the
direct variable comment available in a program or displays the comment. The flag
displays a list of flags provided by the declaration. The following are the different types
of flags:
• System flag
• High-speed link flag
• P2P flag
• PID flag.

Global variable
Global variables are declared and the list displays as in the following figure.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 83


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.2. Global/direct variable

Direct variable comments


It displays the comment of a direct variable entered or declared for the variables.

a) Direct variable: if entering a variable, it displays the data of the direct


variable comment.

TIP
Direct variable varies depending on CPU type.

Flag

84 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.2. Global/direct variable

The following table provides a description of the Flag window.

Field Label Description

Flag kind You can select the type of flag (System, HS link, P2P and PID).

All Used to display the entire list of flags selected from Flag kind. In case of system
flag, all the details are displayed on the window. If All is not selected, only the flag
applicable to the Parameter number and Block index displays.

Parameter This is active only for High-speed link, P2P and PID flag. Only the flag item of the
number input parameter number displays. (For example, if parameter number 1 is entered;
the flag number displays as shown in the following figure.)

Block index This is active only for high-speed link and P2P flag. Only the flag item of the input
block index displays. (For example, if block index 120 is entered; it is as shown in
the following figure.)

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 85


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

5.3 Global/direct variable edit


You can edit the variable kind, variable name, memory address, initial value, retain, used
status, and comment of a variable currently declared as a global/direct variable. In
addition, a new global variable can be added to the list of the global/direct variables.

Global/direct variable registration


Register the global/direct variables to use it in a program. In order to register the list of
global/direct variables, refer to section Register as global variable.

Register as global variable


A variable can be added to the list of global variables, modified or deleted from it.

Field Label Description

Variable kind VAR_GLOBAL and VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT are available.

Variable name The declared variable cannot be duplicated.


• A number is not allowed as the first character.

• A special character is not allowed. (However, ‘_’ is available.)

• Space is not allowed as a character.

• A direct variable with the same name is not allowed (that is, MX0,
WB0)
• If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering
a variable.

Type 23 types of variables are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic type(20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD,

86 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Field Label Description


SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT,
UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY,
DATE_AND_TIME, STRING

Derived type(3): ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF


BOOL) => limit (up to third), STRUCT(that
is, STRUCT name display) => STRUCT
type is not available in STRUCT,
FB_INST(that is, FB name display)

Memory address Indicates the memory address that can be entered using the direct
variable (I, Q, M, R, W).

Initial value Indicates the default value that can be set.

Retain Indicates if memory address is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W: Always retain area.

M: Setting as per basic parameter information.

I, Q: Always not retain area.

Used Indicates whether to use a declared variable.

Comment Allows entry of a comment. Use Ctrl + Enter key to enter multi line
comments.

Line validity To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind, variable
name, and variable type.
• An incomplete entry in a global variable window is highlighted in pink.

TIP
An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key
to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 87


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Registering special/communication module variables


The registering special module variables function is used to register variables of the
respective module by referring to the special module information specified in I/O
parameter. The variable and the comment can be modified.
Perform the following steps to register special/communication module variables:

Step Action
1 Set the special module on the slot in I/O parameter.
2 Select Global Variables/Address in the project window.
3 Select Global Variable tab in the Global Variable/Address window.
4 Click Edit > Register Special/Communication Module Variables.

TIP
Registering Special Module Variables removes existing registered entries and
re-registers with the newly specified I/O parameters.

Copy, cut, delete, and paste


Copy, cut, delete or paste can be executed to edit the list of global/direct variables used in
the program.

Copy
Copy is used to save the data of a selected area in the clipboard. The copied details can
be pasted to the current project or other projects. You can also paste in other applications.
Perform the following steps to copy the data to the windows clipboard.

88 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Step Action
1 Select the area to copy.
2 Click Edit > Copy.

TIP
To select the area,

− Use the mouse to select the cell of (0,0) in order to select the whole
table
− Click Edit > Select All in order to select the whole table.

− Use the mouse to select the column header of the cell in order to
select the whole columns.
− Use the mouse to select the row header of the cell in order to select
the whole rows.
− Use the mouse to drag the part of the cell in order to select the area.
− Use Shift + Arrow keys on the keyboard in order to select the area

Delete
Delete is used to delete the data of a selected area from the list of global/direct variables.
Perform the following steps to delete data of a selected area.

Step Action
1 Select the area to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 89


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Cut
Cut is used to save the selected data in the clipboard in order to add to the current project
or other projects. Unlike Copy, Cut deletes the selected data from the original area.
Perform the following steps to cut the data and save it in windows clipboard.

Step Action
1 Select the area to cut.
2 Click Edit > Cut.

Paste
Paste option enables the pasting of cut or copied data (saved on the clipboard) in the
selected position. If the data is already copied, a dialog box displays to select and change
the data.
• If the data saved in the clipboard is a part of columns,
To paste the data to a specified location:

Step Action
1 Select the position to paste on.
2 Click Edit > Paste.
3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of
variables/comments, the following dialog box displays.

90 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

a) Number: used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste.
b) Replace: used to apply paste.
c) Gray Line: used to display the existing list of variables/comments, which is
not edited.
d) White Line: used to display the list of variables/comments obtained from the
clipboard, which is not edited.
e) OK: applies the lines selected. The existing list of variables/comments is
deleted to add a new list of variables/comments.
f) Cancel: The existing list of variables/comments is not deleted, and a new the
list of variables/comments is not applied accordingly.
g) Select All: used to select all in the Replace column.
h) Unselect All: used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
• If the data saved in the clipboard is of the partial column.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 91


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

To paste the data to a specified location:

Step Action
1 Select the position to paste.
2 Click Edit >Paste.
3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of
variables/comments, the following dialog box displays.

a) Number: Used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste.
b) Replace: Used to apply paste.
c) Gray Line: Used to display the data in the existing cell, which is not edited.
d) White Line: If the variable or address of the data to paste is duplicated, it is
automatically increased and then displayed on the window. In addition, the
cell can be edited.
e) Select All: Used to select all in the Replace column.
f) Unselect All: Used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
92 SoftMaster User's Guide R200
Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

TIP
− If all items are identical, the cell cannot be edited, while if partially
identical, the cell can be edited.
− If the number of the columns saved in the clipboard is greater than
the number of the columns to paste, it is not possible to paste.
− If the data saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the lines
to paste, it is not possible to paste.

− Paste in View Direct Variable Comment regards the data saved in the
clipboard as partial columns.
− Paste is not available in Flag but in other Excel program.

Changing variable name


Perform the following steps to change the variable name.

Step Action
1 On the Project Window, double-click Global Variables/Address. The list of
all global variables is listed.
2 Click the header of the Serial Number column to select the entire list of
variables.
3 Click Edit > Cut or right-click and choose Cut from the menu.
4 Paste the variables into an Excel sheet.
5 Make necessary changes to the variable names.
6 Right click on the header of the Serial Number column and choose Paste.

ATTENTION
Do not re-register the special modules.

Insert line
Insert line is used to insert new lines in the selected area. Inserting a line pushes down the
existing lines.
Perform the following steps to insert new lines.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 93


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Step Action
1 Select a line before which you want to insert a line.
2 Click Edit > Insert Line. A line is inserted above the selected line.

TIP
− If no cell is selected, one line is added to the first line.
− Press Enter or Tab to create a new line at the end of the last line.

− It is available only in the Global Variable window.

Delete line
Delete line is used to delete the lines in a selected area. Perform the following steps to
delete existing lines.

Step Action
1 Select a line.
2 Click Edit > Delete Line. The line is deleted

ATTENTION
Delete Line is not executed If no cell is selected.

Drag and drop


Drag and drop is used to drag selected items and paste in a different position. Perform the
following steps to drag and drop the selected items.

Step Action
1 Select the area to drag and drop.
2 The mouse cursor changes to the state available for drag and drop.
3 Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag and drop the selected items in
a position to paste it.

Drag and drop is available on the Variable Monitoring Window, LD Window, Data
Traces window, Global Variable window of other SoftMaster programs and Direct
Variable Comment window of other SoftMaster programs.

94 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Copy is available when drag and drop is executed in the Excel program.

ATTENTION
− Data does not move but is copied when dragged and dropped
− Paste is not available in Flag.

Export to file
Export to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables in a file that
can be subsequently opened and read from external programs.
To export a file, click Edit > Export to File.

ATTENTION
This function is available only for Global Variables.

Preview
Preview option is used to view the preview of the screen to be printed.
Perform the following steps to see the print preview.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Preview on the window for which you want to preview.
2 A preview of the screen to be printed displays.

TIP
− The size of the columns can be changed to improve readability.
− In View Address, all areas of the specified variable type displays on
the Direct Variable Comment window.

− In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current


window are also displayed on the Preview window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 95


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit

Print
Print option is used to print the screen displayed on Global Variable, Direct Variable
Comment, and Flag windows.
Perform the following steps to print the data.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Print from the window to print.
2 The screen is printed at the configured printer.

TIP
− By changing the size of the column, the details to be printed on paper
can be adjusted.
− In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current
screen are also printed.

Other functions

Sort
− Double-click the column header to sort the column data in the descending/
ascending sequence.
− Current order of data is indicated by the direction of the arrow.

ATTENTION
− It is available only in Global Variable and Flag.
− If the Flag mode changes to Global Variable, variables is aligned to
display.

View
− Screen Zoom-In: Displays a magnified view of the screen. Click View > Zoom-
In.
− Screen Zoom-Out: Displays a shrunk/reduced view of the screen. Click View >
Zoom-Out.

96 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable

− Use Combo Box for screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out. Select the magnification rate in
combo box of the toolbar.
− Width Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the column size applicably to the String
length of the cell. Click View > Resize Width.
− Height Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the line height applicably to the String height
of the cell. Click View > Resize Height.

5.4 Local variable


Local variable declares the variables used in a program or displays the list of declared
variables.

Local variable registration


Local variables are automatically registered when all the attributes are filled.

Editing a local variable


On the list of the currently declared local variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
memory address, initial value, retain, used or not used, and comment can be edited. In
addition, it adds the local variables used in the program to the list of local variables.
A variable can be added, modified, or deleted to/from the list of local variables.

a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, and VAR_EXTERNAL,


VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 97


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable

− If variable type is CONSTANT, it sets the initial value as the default (0).
− If the variable type is VAR_EXTERNAL or
VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, the columns of the initial value and
retain value are displayed as defaults.
b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated within the Local
variable.
− The first character cannot be a number.
− Special characters are not allowed with the exception of ‘_’.
− Space is not allowed as a character.
− The name cannot be identical to the name of a direct variable (that is,
MB4, W4, RW9…)
− If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a
variable.
c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic types(20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT,
USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING

Derived ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit


types(3): (up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is no available in STRCT, FB_INST(that is, FB
name display)

d) Memory address: enter it by using direct variable (I, Q, M, R, and W).


e) Initial value: default value can be set.
f) Retain: if memory allocation is set, retain column is inactive.
R, W: Always retain area.

M: Check it by obtaining basic parameter information.

I, Q: Always not retain area.

g) Used: display whether to use a declared variable.


h) Comment: all characters are available.

98 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable

− Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.


i) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable
kind/variable name and type.
− A local variable not registered as a global variable, is highlighted in pink.

ATTENTION
• An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink.
• Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Add EXTERNAL variable


The list created by the Global Variable can be loaded using the Add External Variable
function.
To add external variables:
• Click Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable. The ADD External Variable window
displays.

Export to file
An Export variable to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables
on the file and to open and read in the external programs.
To export a file:
• Click Edit > Export Variables to File.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 99


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.5. Function block variable

5.5 Function block variable


Function block (FB) variables are a part of user-defined function blocks. FB variable
stores operation results in a command such as timer and counter. You can go to user-
defined function blocks in the project tree to add a function block.

FB variable
You can either declare the variable or view the list of declared FB variables.

FB variable edit
You can edit the variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial
value, retain, used or not used, and comment of the already declared FB variables in the
list. In addition, a new FB variable can be added to the list of the FB variables.

FB variable registration
FB variables, like the global variables and local variables must be registered before they
are used in a program.
A variable can be added to the list of FB variables, modified or deleted from it.

a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT,


VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_EXTERNAL, and VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT
are available.
− If a variable type is CONSTANT, the initial value is set as the default.

100 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.5. Function block variable

− VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, and VAR_IN_OUT cannot set the


initial value.
b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
− The first character cannot be a number.
− Special characters are not available, with the exception of ‘_’.
− Space is not available as a character.
− A direct variable with the same name is not available (that is, MB4, W4,
RW9)
− If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a
variable.
c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic type(20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT,
USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING

Derived type(3): ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit


(up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT(that is FB name
display)

d) Trigger: it is VAR_INPUT or VAR_IN_OUT and active only in BOOL type;


it can set R and F status.
e) Memory address: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
f) Initial Value: it can be set.
− Initial value cannot be set if the variable type is VAR_INPUT,
VAR_OUTPUT or VAR_IN_OUT.
g) Retain: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
h) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
i) Comment: every character is available.
− Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 101


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.5. Function block variable

j) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable type,


variable and type.
− An FB variable not registered as a global variable is displayed in pink.

ATTENTION
• An error that occurs when editing a cell is displayed in pink.
• Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

102 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.6. FUNCTION variable

5.6 FUNCTION variable


Function (FUN) variables are a part of user-defined functions. FUN Variables do not
store the operation results. You can go to user-defined function blocks in the project tree
to add a function.

FUN variable
FUN variable either declares the variable or displays the list of declared FUN variables.

FUN variable edit


On the list of the currently declared FUN variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used and comment items can be edited. In
addition, a new FUN variable can be added to the list of the FUN variables.

FUN variable registration


The FUN variables must be registered before they are used in a program.
A variable can be added to the list of FUN variables, modified or deleted from it.

a) Variable Kind: VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, and


VAR_RETURN are available.
b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
− The first character cannot be a number.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 103


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.6. FUNCTION variable

− Special characters with the exception of ‘_’ are not available.


− Space is not available as a character.
− The name of the FUN variable must not be same as that of a direct
variable.
− If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a
variable.
c) Type: 22 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.
Basic types(20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT,
LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING

Derived types(2): ARRAY(that is ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit


(up to third), STRUCT(that is STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is no available in STRCT

d) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.


e) Comment: every character is available.
− Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.
f) Line validity: To register on FB variable window, it needs variable type,
variable and type.
g) - If not registered on FB variable, it displays in pink.

TIP
− If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.
− Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

104 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.7. Editing variables

5.7 Editing variables


You can edit the variable, type, memory allocation, initial value, retain, and comment
from the list of the already declared data types. In addition, it adds the data type used in
the program to the list of data types.

Variable registration
A variable must be registered before it is used in a program.
A variable can be added to, modified, or deleted from the list of variables.

a) Variable Name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
− The first character cannot be a number.
− Special characters with the exception of ‘_’ are not available.
− Space is not available as a character.
− A name same with direct variable cannot be used as a name.
− If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a
variable.
b) Type: 21 types are available; 20 basic types and 1 derived types

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 105


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.7. Editing variables

Basic types (20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT,
LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING

Derived types(1): ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit


(up to third)

c) Memory address: Read Only.


d) Initial Value: Read Only.
e) Retain: Read Only.
f) Comment: Every character is available.
− Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

TIP
− If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.
− Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

106 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

5.8 User-defined function/function block


A user can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The user-defined function/function block can be created as follows.

Create the user-defined function/function block program

Create the user-defined function/function block I/O variable

User-defined function/function block programming

Compile(register) the user-defined function/function block

Use it in a scan program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 107


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

Creating user-defined function/function block program


In order to create a user-defined function/function block, select Project > Add Item
Function or Project > Add Item > Function Block.

a) Program Name: You can enter a user-defined function/function block. When


the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.
b) Language: You can select a programming language for the user-defined
function/function block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD
language while a user-defined function block can be created by either the LD
or SFC language.
c) Use EN/ENO: You can select whether to use or not use EN/ENO, which is
used under the operation condition of function/function block. If you do not
select EN/ENO, a user should declare BOOL type variable in the first input
and first output parameters of the function/function block.
d) Return Data Type: Designates the type of the results after a user-defined
function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is
created.

108 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

e) Program description: Used to enter the comment of a user-defined


function/function block. If unnecessary, the comment does not have to be
entered.
f) OK: Saves the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
g) Cancel: Cancels the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION
Click OK creates a new item with the name entered in the item of user-
defined function/function block.

Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable


Perform the following steps to create user-defined function/function Block I/O variable.

Step Action
1 If you double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of
user-defined function/function block, the following local variable window is
created.

2 Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed in the lower-half of the local variable window.

a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable recurrenting the value of user-defined


function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 109


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined


function.
b) Function type: used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,
function/function block type by output variable in the local variable window.
The type is as same as when using the user-defined function/function block in
the scan program.

ATTENTION
− There should be at least one or more input and output variables with
a maximum limit of 32.

User-defined function/function block programming


Perform the following steps for user-defined function/function block programming.

Step Action
1 If you double-click a program among the items created with the newly entered
name in the user-defined function/function block, a program window with the
previously designated language appears. The following window shows the
screen created when selecting the LD.
2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window.

ATTENTION
If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select function/function
block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited user-defined
function/function block is registered.

110 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

Using user-defined function/function blocks


Perform the following steps to use user-defined Function/Function Block.

Step Action
1 Open the program to use a user-defined Function/Function Block and to
move the cursor to the position to input.
2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.

3 Select a user-defined Function/Function Block in the Function/Function


Block dialog box.

4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 111


January 2011 Honeywell
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block

Step Action

112 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.1 Overview
LD program displays the PLC program through graphic signals of coils or contact points
used in the relay logic diagram.

6.2 Limits
There are functional limits in LD Program Edit as described in the following table.

Item Description Limit

Maximum contact points


Maximum contact points Up to 31
available to add in a line

Maximum lines available


Maximum lines Up to 65535
to edit

Maximum copy lines


Maximum copy lines Up to 300
available to copy at a time

Maximum paste lines to


Maximum paste lines Up to 300
paste at a time

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 113


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

6.3 Program edit


Edit tools
The input of LD edit items are enabled after you select the input symbols from the LD
tool box and if you click on the specific position or if you press applicable shortcut key.

Symbol Shortcut key Description

Changes to selection
Esc
mode

Normally open contact


F3
point

Normally closed contact


F4
point

Positive transition pulse


Shift + F1
contact point

Negative transition pulse


Shift + F2
contact point

F5 Horizontal line

F6 Vertical line

Shift + F8 Connection line

Shift + F9 Reverse input

F9 Coil

F11 Reverse coil

Shift + F3 Set(latch) coil

Shift + F4 Reset(unlatch) coil

114 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Symbol Shortcut key Description

Positive transition sensing


Shift + F5
coil

Negative transition
Shift + F6
sensing coil

F10 Function/function block

Shift + F7 Extended function

Normally open OR
Ctrl+3
contact point

Normally closed OR
Ctrl+4
contact point

Positive-conversion
Ctrl+5 detection OR contact
point

Negative-conversion
Ctrl+6 detection OR contact
point

The following are the shortcut keys related to the movement of the cursor. Applicable
shortcut keys can be customized by users of SoftMaster.

Shortcut Key Description

Home Moves to the beginning of the column.

Ctrl+Home Moves to the beginning of the program.

Back space Deletes the current data and moves to the left.

→ Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

← Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.

↑ Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.

↓ Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.

End Moves to the end of the column/row.

Ctrl + End Moves to the last line edited.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 115


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

TIP
• Among shortcut keys in edit toolbox, ‘s’ stands for Shift key, ‘c’ for Ctrl
key. For example, Positive transition pulse contact point: Shift + F1 → s
+ F1 → sF1.

• The shortcut keys described in edit tool are based on the shortcut keys
basically provided in SoftMaster.
• For setting details on the user-defined shortcut keys, Refer to Shortcut
keys.

Input contact point


This is used for adding contact points (normally open contact, normally closed contact,
positive transition pulse contact, and negative transition pulse contact).
Perform the following steps to add a contact point:

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the contact point.

2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area
or click shortcut key applicable to the contact to insert.
3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.

116 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

TIP
Click Tool > Options. Select Common Editor under options. If the input
mode is promptly released from the edit page, the Variable Input dialog box is
not automatically displayed when inserting a contact point and coil.

The basic operation of Enter key is to enter identical instructions used in


previous edit.

For example, if a normally open contact is entered in the previous edit, the
normally open contact input dialog box displays when the enter key is
pressed again.

Input OR contact point


Input OR contact points are normally open OR contact point, normally closed OR contact
point, positive-conversion detection OR contact point, negative-conversion detection OR
contact point.
To add an OR contact point, perform the following steps.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the OR contact point.

2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area
or click the shortcut key applicable to the OR contact point to insert.
3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 117


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

ATTENTION
• In duplicated mode, in case contact point is in cursor, OR
connection does not operate.

• In application instruction, vertical line is not inserted.

Entering variable/address
It is used to enter the Address or Variable/Comment.

118 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Field Label Description

Variable Name It is the variable or declared variable name. If the input string is
of variable format and the applicable string is not registered as a
variable in the Variable/Comment, the Variable/Comment Add
dialog box displays.

Local variable Displays the list of declared local variables.

Address Comment Displays the address.

Flag Displays the list of flags. Detailed flag type can be selected on
the flag item.

List Displays the list of flags for selection. You can select among
System/High-speed link/P2P/PID Flags.

All Select this option to display all the flags for the item. Clear this
option to display the flags applicable to the input parameter
number/block index.

Parameter number Enter and set the number for each selected flag item. 0~12 is
available for HS link, 0~8 for P2P, and 0~63 for PID.

Block Index Enter the block number for each selected flag item. 0~127 is
available for High-speed link and 0~63 for P2P.

Global variable Click to display the list of global variables. It can be registered
as an EXTERNAL variable.

New Variable Click to add a variable to the list of local variables.

Edit Variable Click to edit a selected variable.

Delete Variable Click to delete a selected variable from the list of local variables.

OK Click to save changes and close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 119


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Add/edit variable name


It is used to Add or edit a variable.

Field Label Description

Variable Name Enter the name of the variable to be added.

Data Type Select a data type for the variable.

Variable Kind Select a variable type.

Address Allocate a direct address for the variable.

Initial value Enter the initial value for the variable.

Trigger Select the trigger state for the variable.

Retain Select to retain the current state of the variable.

Description Enter a description for the variable.

TIP
If the variable name is entered on the Variable/Address dialog box, it is
automatically completed based on the currently displayed Variable/Comment
list.

120 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Inserting lines
Insert a horizontal line for horizontal connection between LD edit factors, and a vertical
line for vertical connections.

Inserting a horizontal line


Perform the following steps to insert a horizontal line.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to connect.
2 Select the shortcut key of Horizontal Line Input or select Horizontal Line on
the tool box and select the edit area to insert the Horizontal Line.

Inserting a vertical line


Perform the following steps to add a vertical line.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to connect.
2 Select the shortcut key of Vertical Line Input or select Vertical Line on the tool
box and select the edit area to insert the Vertical Line.

TIP
The vertical line is inserted to the left of the current location of the cursor.

Inserting coil
It is used to insert coils, that is, coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil, and
negative transition pulse coil.
Perform the following steps to insert reverse coil/positive transition pulse coil/negative
transition pulse coil.
R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 121
January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location where the coil is to be inserted.
2 On the tool box, select the type of coil to insert and then click the edit area or
click the shortcut key applicable to the coil to insert it.
3 After a variable name is entered on the Variable Selection dialog box, click
OK.

TIP
• If a coil and output related application instruction is entered, a horizontal
line is automatically inserted to connect with the left item.

• In case there is a duplicate coil, output to output module, according to


the status of last coil.

Inserting a function block


It is used to enter a function (block) for operation.
Perform the following steps to enter a function (block).

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location where the function (block) is to be entered.
2 On the tool box, select the function (block) to enter and then click the edit
area or click the shortcut key applicable to the function (block) input.

Select a function/function block.

122 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

a) Name: Select the function (block) to use.


b) Search: Used to search for the name of a function(block)
c) List: Select function, function block or function/function block to
display the appropriate information.
d) Category: Select a category for the function (block).
e) Function list: Displays the list of function (block) of a selected category.
f) Function information: Displays the information and properties of a
function. In case of function, a user can set the properties of an input
parameter; in case of function block, a user can select the name and
class of an instance.
g) OK: Click to apply the details and close the dialog box.
h) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.
3 On the Function (block) Input dialog box, enter the function (block), and then

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 123


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action
click OK.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the function (block), refer to the 2MLI CPU
User’s Guide.

Favorite function block


It displays a function block that is mostly used in the current project or recently used.
You can also register a function to frequently use in the future.

Viewing function block


Perform the following steps to display a function block:

Step Action
1 Click View > Instruction Window.
2 Viewing Function block.

A function block is automatically registered when it is used in a LD program.


The function block is listed on the beginning of the list. If a function is already
added to the list, the item (function) displays in the beginning.

124 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action
4 If the current list selection is ‘Most Recently Used’, the function is determined
by the frequency of function block used.

TIP
− A function block is automatically registered if the function block is
selected on the function block dialog box.
− A function copied or pasted does not affect the frequency and the
recent use.

Viewing favorite function


It enables you to register a function block for frequent use in projects.
Perform the following steps to register a function block.

Step Action
1 Select a Favorite Function in the selection box.

2 Click Edit to view the list of Functions. The Favorite Function Setting
window displays.

The field description for Favorite Function Setting window are as


follows:

Favorite Function: Displays the currently selected function. The content


displayed on the Favorite Function List is the content to be displayed in the
Command window.

Function List: Displays the list of function blocks available for the current
project.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 125


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

Add: Select a function and click Add to add the selected function to the
Favorite Function list.

Remove: Click to delete a selected function from the Favorite Function.

Up: Click to move a selected item to a higher level of the favorite function.

Down: Click to move a selected item to a lower level of the favorite function.

Clear All: Click to clear the current favorite function list.

OK: Click to check and save changes. It also closes the dialog box.

Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

Use function
It is used to use the function block on the list.
Perform the following steps to use the function block.
Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the position to insert a function.
2 Double-click a command to insert in the Command Window.

126 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

TIP
It is also possible to drag an item to insert in the Command Window and
insert it to the LD program.

Entering comments
It is used to insert the Rung and Output Comment. The comment displayed at the start of
Rung is called Rung Comment, and the comment for the output factor is called Output
Comment.

Adding rung comment


Perform the following steps to enter a rung comment:

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the rung comment.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 127


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action
2 Click Edit > Comment/Label Input.

Enter the Comment and Label.

a) Comment: Selected to enter the Rung Comment.


b) Label: Selected to enter the label.
c) OK: Click to apply the selected details and to close the dialog box.
d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.
3 If the Rung Comment dialog box displays, enter the comment and click OK.

Enter or edit the Rung Comment or the Output Comment.

a) Comment: Enter the details of the rung comment or the output


comment.
b) OK: Click to apply the input details and to close the dialog box.
c) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

128 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Output comment
Perform the following steps to enter the output comment.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the output comment.
2 Double-click or press Enter key.
3 Enter the output comment on the Output Comment dialog box and click OK.

TIP
You can enter an output comment only when an output is available.

Input label
It is used to enter the label to refer to from the extended function of JMP.
Perform the following steps to enter a label on a function.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the label.
2 Click Edit > Insert Comment/Label. The Comment/Label dialog box
displays.
3 Select Label and press Enter or click OK. The Label List window displays.
4 In the Label List window, enter the label to add and click OK.

The field description for Label List window are as follows:


a) Label: Enter the name of the label.
b) Label in: Displays the label currently in use in the same scan program.
Selecting an item on the Label in use, the selected item is entered.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 129


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

TIP
− A maximum of 16 English characters can be used for the label name.

− The first character of the label cannot be an integer or a special


character.
− Label Input rules are similar to the Variable/Comment Input rules.

Insert extension function


It is used to insert the extension function such as insert/call subroutine and program end.
Perform the following steps to insert an extension function.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the position to insert an extension function.

2 Click Edit > Tools > Extension Function. The Extension Function window
displays.
3 Select an extension function to insert and click OK.

The field description for Label List window are as follows:


a) Extension: Shows an extended function or displays the inserted
extended function.
b) Command List: Displays the available extended function.
c) OK: Click to apply a selected item and to close the dialog box.
d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

TIP
Extension functions, SBRT, and RET cannot be inserted at LD used in SFC
Action and Transition.

130 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Insert cell
It is used to insert a new cell at the current cursor position.
Perform the following steps to insert a new cell.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the cell.
2 Click Edit > Insert Cell.

TIP
If inserting a cell in Function Block, a variable is also moved together.

Insert line
It is used to insert a new line at the current cursor position.
Perform the following steps to insert a line.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the line in.
2 Click Edit > Insert Line.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 131


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

TIP
a) If you Insert Line, a new line is inserted in the current cursor position.
b) If you select an area for Line Insert, new lines equal to the lines in the
selected area are inserted.
c) If the function block is contained, the line cannot be inserted.

Delete item
It is used to delete the input contact point, coil, function block, line, rung/output
comment, and label.
Perform the following steps to delete an item.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the item.
2 Click Edit > Delete.

Delete cell
It is used to delete factors such as the input contact point and horizontal line to draw in
the next cell.
Perform the following steps to delete cell (input contact point and horizontal line).

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the cell from.
2 Click Edit > Delete Cell.

132 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action

TIP
Position the cursor on the cell to be deleted and press Delete on the
keyboard. Alternately, right-click and select Delete from the context menu.

Delete line
It is used to delete all the cells in the selected row.
Perform the following steps to delete a line.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor onto the line to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete Line.

Copy/cut/paste
It is used to copy data from a selected area, or cut the data to copy at a specific position.
Unlike Copy, the Cut function deletes the data from the selected area.

Copy and paste


Perform the following steps to copy the data to windows clipboard.

Step Action
1 Select the area to copy.
2 Click Edit > Copy.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 133


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Step Action
3 Move the cursor to the area to paste.
4 Click Edit > Paste.

Cut and paste


Perform the following steps to cut and paste selected data.

Step Action
1 Select the area to cut.
2 Click Edit > Cut.
3 Move the cursor to the area to paste on.
4 Click Edit > Paste.

Undo and redo


It is used to Undo the details edited by Program Edit back to its previous state, or execute
the cancelled action again.

134 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Undo (Example of delete)


Perform the following steps to undo a particular action.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor onto the position to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete.
3 On the menu, select Edit > Undo.

Redo (Example of delete)


To redo a particular action:
• Click Edit > Redo.

TIP
− All the edited details can be cancelled or executed again.

− The number of times to cancel the execution is unlimited.

Program edit mode


LD Program supports two modes; Insert Mode and Overwrite mode. It is applied when
inserting a contact point or function (block).
Insert mode:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 135


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

Overwrite mode:

TIP
Use Insert key on the keyboard to toggle between Overwrite and Insert.

If inserting a contact point


Overwrite mode: If entering a different type of contact point, the only contact point type
is changed with the input address or variable remained (it does not work if a same type
contact point is selected).

Insert mode: Always inserts a new contact point to a designated position, regardless of
contact point type. Insertion operation is as same as Insert Cell.

If inserting a function (block)


Overwrite mode: Inserts a function (block) into the current position.

Insert mode: It inserts a space as high as a function (block) if there is no enough space to
insert the function. Insert Space is as same as Insert Line.

136 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 137


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing program options

6.4 Viewing program options


View IL program
It is used to convert the LD program to the IL program and displays with the IL program.
Perform the following steps to view an IL program.

Step Action
1 Select a program.

2 Select View > IL.

ATTENTION
• In case of an incomplete rung in the program, the LD program cannot be
converted to an IL program.

• Edit is not possible in IL View.

Program magnification change


This is used for changing the magnification of the LD program displayed on the screen.

138 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing program options

Zoom-in
To Zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In.

Zoom-out
To Zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out.

TIP
− Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel
forward to zoom-in.

− Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel
backward to zoom-out.
− On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the magnification.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on Tool bars, refer to Tool bar.

View address
It is used for displaying only the name of the address for the variable or address used as
the contact point, coil, and function (block). If there is no address, it displays a name of
variable.
To view an address:
• Select View > Addresses.

View variables
It is used for displaying the name of the variable for the variable or address used as the
contact point, coil, and function (block).
If no variable is declared for the address, it is displayed as the address name.
To view variables:
• Select View > Variables.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 139


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing program options

View address/variables
It is used for displaying the name of the address/variable for the variable or address used
in the contact point, coil, and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view address/variable:
• Select View > Address/Variables.

View address/comment
It is used for displaying the address/comment for the variable or address used in the
contact point, coil, and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view an address/comment:
• Select View > Address/Comments.

TIP
− If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
amount of the edited program steps.

− Print function of the Address/Variable/Comment is available. For the


details of print option, refer LD program print.

View variables/comments
It is used for displaying the variable/comment for the device used as the operand of the
contact point, coil, and application instruction.
To view a variable/comment:
• Select View > Variables/Comments.

ATTENTION
• If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
number of the edited program steps.

• Print function of the Device/Variable/Comment is available.

140 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing program options

Adjust number of contact point


It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the
number of contact points is the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output
position.
To adjust the number of contact point:
• Click View > Change Columns > Increase Columns.
If the data on the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to
display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.

TIP
− It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.

− The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 32.


− The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for
SFC action and transition is 5.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 141


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

LD view properties
It is used to select the viewing options of the LD window. In the window, the options of
address, variable and comment view can be set while magnification and the number of
contact points can be set simultaneously.
Perform the following steps to view LD screen properties.

Step Action
1 Click View > LD Properties. The LD View Properties window displays.
2 Change the required LD properties and click OK.

The field description for LD View Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

View Option Indicates the view options for variable and


address.

Magnification Indicates the magnification on the window. It


is allowed from 40 to 200%.

No. of contacts Indicates the number of contact points


displayed on the window.

OK Click to apply the settings and to close the


dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

Apply Click to apply the settings to the current LD


window.

Default Click to set the current settings as the default


of LD window. If creating a new LD program,
it is displayed in the currently set view mode.

Reset Click to restore the current settings to the


default.

All Windows Click to apply current settings to all windows.

142 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

TIP
− In the LD Properties window, Address + Variable + Comment View
Options cannot be set.
− In case of All Windows, the setting is applied to all of SFC program
action, transition and user’s function (block) created by LD.

6.5 Additional edit function


Additional functions for convenient edit are described as follows.

Optimize program
It is used for deleting the horizontal and empty lines between the contact points, to
optimize the position where LD diagram is drawn.
Perform the following steps to optimize the program.
• Click Edit > Optimize Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 143


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

ATTENTION
• Optimize program if once executed cannot be reverted to its previous
state through execution cancel.
• It may take some time according to the size of the program.
• In case LD logic is not complete, optimization function does not operate.

Block mask instruction


This is used to specify or cancel the area block mask in the PLC among the LD
programs.

Block mask instruction setting


Perform the following steps to edit the block mask instruction settings.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the rung to specify the block mask.
2 Click Edit > Set Block Mask.

144 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

Canceling block mask instruction


Perform the following steps to remove the block mask instruction.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the rung to cancel the Block Mask instruction.
2 Click Edit > Remove Block Mask.

Bookmark
It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the
line.

Set bookmark
Perform the following steps to set a bookmark.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to a line to specify the bookmark on.
2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 145


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

Step Action

Reset bookmark
Perform the following steps to reset a bookmark.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the line to cancel the bookmark from.
2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Reset.

Reset all bookmarks


To reset all bookmarks, click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.

146 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

Previous bookmark
To edit the previous bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.

Next bookmark
To edit the next bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 147


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

TIP
− Bookmark is specified on the line unit.
− Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options are not
included in Undo and Redo.

Go to

Finding specific line


It is used to move to the specified line position, or go to the position of the edited label
and rung comment.
Perform the following steps to find a specific line in the program:

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line. The Go To Line window displays.

The field description for Go To Line window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Go to line Specifies the line to go to.

Program list Displays the list of the current PLC programs.

148 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

Step Action

Go to Click to close the window and to go to the


selected program’s line/step.

Cancel Click to close the window.


2 Select the line to go to and the program from the list. Click Go to for moving
the specified line/step.

TIP
− Go To Line is available only in the LD program.

− This function is not available for the LD used for SFC


Action/Transitions.

Finding specific label


Perform the following steps to find a specific label.

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > Label. The Go To Label window displays.

The field description for Go To Label window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Program Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If you


select ‘All Programs’, the list of all the labels
displays.

Labels list Displays the list of the labels used in the selected
program.

Go To Click to close the window and to go to the selected


label.

Cancel Click to close the window.

2 Select the label and program from the list. Click Go to to move to the
specified label.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 149


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

TIP
− Go To Label is available only in the LD Program.

− This function is not available for the LD used for SFC


Action/Transition.

Finding specific rung comment


Perform the following steps to find a specific comment in a program.

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > Rung Comment. The Go to ring comment
window displays.

The field description for Go to ring comment window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Program Displays the list of the current PLC


programs. If you select ‘All
Programs’, the list of all the rung
comments displays.

Rung comment list Displays the list of the rung


comments used in the selected
program.

Go to Click this to go to the selected rung


comment.

Cancel Click to close the window.


2 Select the program and the rung comment to go to from the list. Click Go to
to move to the specified rung comment.

TIP
− Go To Rung Comment is available only in the LD Program.

− The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

Finding END command


Perform the following steps to go to the END command.

150 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > END Command. The Go To END Instruction
window displays.

The field description for Go To END Instruction window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Program Displays the list of the current PLC


programs. If you select ‘All Programs’, the
list of all the END instructions is displays.

END instruction list Displays the list of the END instructions


used in the selected program.

Go to Click to close the window to go to the


selected END instruction.

Close Click to close the window.


2 Select the program and the END command to go to from the list. Click Go to
to move to the specified END command.

TIP
− Go To END Instruction is available only in the LD Program.

− The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 151


January 2011 Honeywell
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function

152 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.1 Overview
SFC is used for controlling the execution sequence of other programs (LD, ST) by using
graphic symbols (step, transition, and branch).

7.2 SFC program limitations


SFC program has the following limitations when editing a program.

Item Description Limit

Indicates the maximum number of available


Maximum step
steps excluding the step used as step 512 steps
number
variable in the program.

Maximum row
Maximum number of editable rows. 65,535 rows
number

Maximum
Maximum number of editable columns. 65,535 columns
column number

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 153


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

7.3 Program edit


Edit tools
To begin entering the inputs of SFC Edit items, select the input symbols from the LD tool
box and click on a specific location or press the associated shortcut key.

Symbol Shortcut Key Description

Esc Changes to selection mode.

- Step+Transiton or Transition+Step

- Action

- Block+Transition or Transition+Block

- Label

- Jump

- Left Branch

- Right Branch

The following shortcut keys are related with the movement of the cursor. Applicable
Shortcut Keys can be specified by users in the SoftMaster.

Shortcut Key Description

Home Moves to the start of the column.

Ctrl + Home Moves to the start of the program

→ Deletes the current data and moves to the left.

← Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

154 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Shortcut Key Description

↑ Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.

↓ Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.

End Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.

Ctrl + End Moves to the end of the column.

ATTENTION
− Among shortcut keys in Edit Toolbox, ‘s’ stands for Shift key, ‘c’ for
Ctrl key, ‘a’ for Alt key.
− The shortcut keys described in Edit Tool are based on the shortcut
keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For more details on the user-
defined shortcut keys, refer to Configuring shortcut keys.
− For each SFC program added to the project program list, atleast 64
words of automatic variables must be declared.

Input step/transition
This is used to insert a Step/Transition in a program.
Perform the following steps to insert a Step/Transition.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key
applicable to symbol.
3 A new Step/Transition is inserted.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 155


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action

ATTENTION
− Step name is allocated automatically; however, you can edit it.
− According to input location, Step + Transition or Transition + Step are
inserted.

Item of location selected

Step + Transition, start line of parallel branch, label, selection


Transition branch termination line.

Transition Step, block, start line of selection branch, parallel


+ Step branch termination line.

− Read Only variables cannot be used for Step/Transition variable.

156 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Input action
Action is executed when step is activated. Executes the program connected with action.
Perform the following steps to edit the symbol in a program.
Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit
2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key
applicable to symbol.

or

ATTENTION
− Action’s location is different according to selected edit area.

Location item

Right Action’s location is the right of step when you select a step.

Action’s location is the bottom of action when you select an


Bottom
action.

− The number of steps connected with one step is not limited.

− Action cannot be connected with a block.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 157


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Input block/transition
Perform the following steps to insert a Block/Transaction.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the block you want edit.
2 Select a block on the tool box and click the edit area or click the shortcut key
applicable to symbol.
3 A New block/Transition is inserted.

ATTENTION
− Block input location standard is same as step input.

Input label
Perform the following steps to input a label.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
2 On the tool box, select the label to enter and then click the edit area or click
the shortcut key applicable to symbol.
3 The new label is inserted.

158 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action

ATTENTION
− Label can be inserted when selecting a step or block.
− Label is inserted ahead of the selected step or block.

Input jump
Perform the following steps to insert a jump in a program.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
2 On the tool box, select the Jump to insert and then click the edit area or click
the shortcut key applicable to symbol.
3 A new jump is inserted.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 159


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

ATTENTION
− The jump can be inserted when selecting the last transition within
selection branch or transition of program in the last row.
− The jump is inserted ahead of the selected transition.
− The jump is available within the same program.

Create left branch


To create a left branch, perform the following steps.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to start branch.
2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
3 It displays branch start location and branch connection location.

Branch start location

Branch termination location

4 Move cursor to the branch end location.


5 Select the branch end location.

160 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action
6 The branch is created.

ATTENTION
− When selecting the branch start location, the selection branch or
parallel branch is created according to the branch start location.

Item of branch start Line shape


location

Selection branch Step, block Horizontal one line

Parallel branch Transition Horizontal two line

Extending branch
Perform the following steps to extend a branch.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the branch to extend.
2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
appropriate shortcut key.
3 A new branch is created.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 161


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action

ATTENTION
− The maximum number of branches is limited to the number of rows.

Create right branch


To create a right branch, perform the following steps.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to start the branch.
2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
3 It displays the branch start location and the branch connection location.

Branch start location

Branch termination location

162 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action
4 Move the cursor to the branch termination location.
5 Select the branch end location.
6 The branch is created.

ATTENTION
− The procedure to create a parallel branch is same as creating a left
branch. Refer to Create left branch.

Extending branch
Perform the following steps to extend a branch of a location.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location to extend the branch.
2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
3 New branch is inserted.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 163


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action

Edit step property


You can edit step name, comment, and so on.
Perform the following steps to edit Step property of a location.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Step Properties window displays.

The field description for Step Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter the name of the step.

Comment Enter a comment for the step.

Initial step Designates it as initial step.

Step variable Refers to step name from local variable list.

Find To find a variable from the local variable list.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close window without saving.

164 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

ATTENTION
− The initial step is execution start step of the program. You can
designate only one. When checking the program, it checks the error.
− When using step variable, you can refer it from other programs.

Transition property
You can edit the transition’s name, comment.
Perform the following steps to edit the transition property of a location.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Transition Properties window
displays.

The field description for Transition Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter transition’s name.

Comment Enter the transition’s comment.

Type Select transition as variable or program.

List Displays the other transition used in the


current program.

Find You can select variable from local variable


list.

Less Hides the list.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− Transition program can be written by LD program.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 165


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Action property
You can edit the action’s name, comment, and qualifier.
Perform the following steps to edit the action property of a location.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Action Properties window displays.

The field description for Action Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter the name of the action.

Comment Enter a comment for the action.

Type Designates action as variable or program.

Post scan Deactivates the coil in the action after


executing the action.

List Displays the other actions used in the current


program.

Qualifier Acts differently according to action qualifier.

Time Enters time according to qualifier.

Find You can select variable from local variable


list.

Less Hides the list.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

166 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

ATTENTION
− Action can operate differently according to the action qualifier.

Qualifier Functions Action characteristic

N (Non- Action is executed when step is activated status step


stored) activated. Action operating

R (overriding When the step is activated, the action


Reset) whose qualifier is S, SD, DS, and SL
stops. R qualifier is executed
S (Set) If the step is activated, it continues its
execution unit, R qualifier is executed.

L (time If the step is activated, it continues its Setting time


Limited) execution when the time is being set.

D (time If the step is activated, the action starts


Delayed) after setting the time.
1 scan execution
P (Pulse) If the step is activated, it continues its
execution during one scan.

SD (Stored If the step is activated, action starts after R


& time setting time and it continues its execution
Delay) unit until R qualifier is executed. If R R
qualifier is executed before setting time,
action is not executed.

DS (time If step is activated, action starts after


Delayed & setting time and it continues its execution
Stored) unit until R qualifier is executed. If R
qualifier is executed before setting time R
or step is deactivated, action is not
executed.

SL (Stored & It continues its execution when the time


time Limited) is being set or unit R qualifier is
executed.
R

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 167


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

ATTENTION
− You can insert a time expression such as “T#1h2m3s” “T#2m”
“T#15s”.
− Action program can be written by LD ST or SFC.

Edit block property


You can edit block’s property name, comment, and other details.
Perform the following steps to edit the Block property of a location.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Block Properties window
displays.

The field description for Block Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter block’s name.

Comment Enter the block’s comment.

List Displays the other block used in the current


program.

Less Hides the list.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− Block can be written by only SFC program.
− Action cannot be connected with block.

168 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Edit label property


You can edit label’s name.
Perform the following steps to edit Label property of a block.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the block you want to edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Label Properties window
displays.

The field description for Label Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter label name.

List Displays the name of other labels used in the


current program.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Jump property
You can edit jump’s name.
Perform the following steps to edit Jump property of a program.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
2 Press Enter key or double-click a block.

The field description for Jump Properties window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enter jump name.

List Displays the name of other labels used in the current


program.

OK Click to save the contents and to close the window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 169


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Step Action

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− Ensure that the name of the Jump is the same as label name.
− Jump to other SFC program is not available.

Set branch priority


You can set branch priority.
Perform the following steps to set branch priority.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the select branch’s start location.
2 Click Edit > Set Branch Priority.
3 Click the select branch’s start location in order to set branch priority.

4 To complete the editing, click outside the selection branch.

ATTENTION
− You can set selection branch priority equal to the branch number.
− When not setting branch priority, compilation is initiated from left to
right. Program is executed from left to right.

170 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Erase branch priority


You can erase branch priority.
Perform the following steps to erase branch priority.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the branch that has priority.
2 Click Edit > Erase Branch Priority.
3 Branch priority is erased.

Delete item
You can delete a step, transition, action, block, label, jump, and branch of a program.
Perform the following steps to delete an existing item.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location where the item you want to delete exists.
2 Click Edit > Delete.

ATTENTION
− The transition and blocks can be deleted by performing the above
step.
− Sometimes deleting is not available. In this case, editing is canceled
automatically after the warning message.

− Deleting a branch deletes all items under the branch.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 171


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Copy/cut/paste
Perform the following steps to copy and paste data.

Step Action
1 Select the block/function you want to copy.
2 Click Edit > Copy.
3 Copied area displays.

4 Move the cursor to the location you want to paste.


5 Click Edit > Paste.

ATTENTION
− The item under step, transition and block can be copied with step,
transition and block according to selected location.
− Sometimes pasting is not available according to the location to paste.
At this time, editing is canceled automatically.

− When copying the branch start point, the item under branch is copied
with branch start point.
− When pasting the branch, select the branch start point.

172 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

− The selection branch can be pasted into the selection branch and the
parallel branch can be pasted into the parallel branch.
− When pasting into the action, select the step you want to paste.
− Principal to paste is same with item input.

Cut/paste
Perform the following steps to Cut and Paste data.

Step Action
1 Select the location to cut.
2 Click Edit > Cut.

3 Move the cursor to the location to paste.


4 Click Edit > paste.

Undo and redo


SoftMaster provides the standard undo and redo options.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 173


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit

Undo (example)
Perform the following steps to undo an action.

Step Action
1 Place the cursor to the location you want to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete.
3 Click Edit > Undo. Deleting is cancelled.

Redo (example)
Perform the following steps to redo an action.
• Click Edit > Redo to redo an action.

ATTENTION

174 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

− You can Undo and Redo for all items.

− Unlimited number of undo is available.

Program edit mode


SFC program supports only insert mode.

Insert mode:

7.4 View program


You can zoom in or zoom out on a program.

Program zoom in/out

Zoom in
To Zoom In:
• Click View > Zoom In.

Zoom out
To Zoom Out:
• Click View > Zoom Out.

TIP
− Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel
forward to zoom-in.
− Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel
backward to zoom-out.
− On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the magnification.

SFC property
It enables you to edit SFC property.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 175


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

To edit SFC property, perform the following steps:


• Click Tools > Options > SFC.

a) Show comment: Displays the comment of step, transition, action, and block.
b) Show print area: Displays the printing area with thick dotted line.
c) Show page number: Displays page number printed in the print area.
d) Step column width: Sets width of vertical column of step, transition location.
e) Action column width: Displays width of vertical column of action location.
f) Utilize SFC split window: You can use SFC split window.
g) Split window position: You may decide in which direction the window gets
divided.
h) Split window contents: You may decide which contents the program displays
in the split window.

ATTENTION
− The range of the Step column is 20~200.
− The range of the Action column is 70~400.

176 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

Show comment

<Not Showing comment> <Showing comment>

Show print area

Show page number

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 177


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

Step column width

<Step column 68 pixel (basic) screen> <Step column 100 pixel screen>

Action column width

<Action column100 pixel (basic) screen> <Action column 150 pixel screen>

178 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

Utilize SFC split window

<With split window>

<Without split window>

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 179


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

Split window contents

<Viewing the selected action, transition: when selecting action>

<Viewing the identical SFC program>

180 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

<Viewing the fix split window contents: displays the previous screen>

Split window position

<Right>

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 181


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

<Bottom>

View block/action/transition list


You can check other programs list used in the SFC program and edit the name and
comment.
Perform the following steps to view Block/Action/Transition List.

Step Action
1 Click View > Block/Action/Transition List.
2 The list displays.

182 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program

Open action/transition
In the SFC program, open the selected action, transition with the new window.
Perform the following steps to open Action/Transition.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the location you want to open the program.
2 Click View > Open Action/Transition.
3 Open the selected program in a new window.

Address/variables
Displays variables or address used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Variables name. If variable does not have an address, it displays the variable
name.
To view Address/Variables:
• Click View > Address/Variables.

Address/comments
Displays variables or addresses used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Comment. If the variable does not have an address, it displays the name of the
variable.
To view Address/Comments:
• Click View > Address/Comments.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 183


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.5. Edit additional function

ATTENTION
− Modifying the settings may result in increased viewing time based on
the program size.
− When printing, Address/Variables/Comments is supported. For
additional information, refer Print.

Adjust contact number


It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the window. Here, the
number of contact points is equal to the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the
output position.
To adjust the number of contact points:
• Click View > Change columns > Contact no.

If the data to the right of the current window is larger than the number of contact points
to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.

ATTENTION
− It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.

− The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 31.


− The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for
SFC action and transition is 5.

184 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.5. Edit additional function

7.5 Edit additional function


SoftMaster provides an edit additional function for convenience of edit.

Bookmark setting
It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the
line. For more information, refer to Bookmark.

Go to
You can go to designated line, edited label, and rung comment. For more information,
refer to Go to.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 185


January 2011 Honeywell
7. SFC Edit
7.5. Edit additional function

186 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.1 Cross reference
It is used to display the application details of all the addresses and variables used in a
program. It includes contact points (normally open contact point, normally closed contact
point, positive transition pulse contact point and negative transition pulse contact point),
coils (coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil and negative transition pulse coil),
I/O parameter of function(block) and all the addresses and variables used as the operand
of extended functions.

View all addresses


It is used to display all the addresses used in the current PLC.
To view all the addresses in a PLC, click View > Cross Reference. The Message
Window displays.
The field description for Message Window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Displays the names of all the addresses used in the current PLC.

Variable
Displays the names of all variables used in the current PLC.
Name

PLC Displays names of PLC belonging to the current program.

Program Displays the name of the program using the applicable address.

Position Displays the coordinates inside the program.

Comment Displays the comment of address and variables.

The following signs are displayed for the type of instructions:

-( )-: Coil

-(/)-: Reverse coil

Information -(S)-: Set coil

-(R)-: Reset coil

-(P)-: Positive transition pulse coil

-(N)-: Negative transition pulse coil

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 187


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.1. Cross reference

Field Label Description

-| |-: Normally open contact point

-|/|-: Normally closed contact point

-|P|-: Positive transition pulse contact point

-|N|-: Negative transition pulse contact point

-[F]-: Extended function parameter

-VAR-: Function(block) I/O parameter

Data sorting
Click the column header to sort the applicable column. Whenever you click the column,
it is sorted in the ascending and then descending sequence, repeatedly. A triangle is
displayed on the basic column of the current alignment. The normal triangle indicates
that the data is sorted in the ascending sequence, and a reverse triangle indicates that the
data is sorted in the descending sequence.
Example 1: Alignment in the ascending sequence based on the address names.

Example2: Alignment in the descending sequence based on the address names.

Go to
It is used to go to the position of the program using the selected address. Double-click the
applicable line, or right-click to select Go To from the menu.

188 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.1. Cross reference

Select row
It is used to display the specific data only on the screen. Right-click and select each item
from the Select Row menu.

Lock data
Details of the Cross Reference Window are updated when the cursor moves in the
program. If you do not want to update them, specify the Fix function. Right-click and
select Lock Data.

Delete data
It deletes all the details of the Cross Reference Window.

Output cross reference instantly


If an address or variable is selected in the program, the used position and the application
are displayed.
Perform the following steps to view the output cross-reference instantly.
Step Action
1 Select the Cross Reference tab to display the Cross Reference Result.

Move the cursor to the position of the address to display its purpose.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 189


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.2. Used address

ATTENTION
− If ‘Output cross reference instantly’ is used, the edit speed is likely
to slow down.
− Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page,
select ‘Output cross reference instantly’ option.

Check duplicate coil instantly


This function is used to check the applicable address or variable if used as duplicate
whenever the coil is edited. If the address is used as a coil in a different location inside
the PLC, the list for the program name, location and step displays.
Perform the following steps to check a duplicated coil instantly:

Step Action
1 Add a coil.
2 Select and copy the line where the applicable coil is included. Move to the
next line and paste.

ATTENTION
− If check duplicated coil instantly is used, the edit speed may be
slow.
− Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page,
select Check duplicated coil instantly option.

− Check duplicated coil instantly checks the coil and the reverse coil,
positive transition pulse coil, and negative transition pulse coil.

190 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.2. Used address

8.2 Used address


It shows all the addresses and the numbers used in the program (LD, SFC). The addresses
used in each address area according to the designated types are displayed as classified
into input and output.

a) Address Display: Displays each address used in the program.


b) Word Column: Displays the number of the applicable address types used in
the program. The column displays the number in accordance with the address
type designated when executing the address used.
c) Bit Column: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses used in the
program. The addresses of S area, T area, and C area are displayed. The
column displays the addresses of the types smaller than those designated when
executing the used address in bit type. Therefore, if designating word type, it
displays the bit only. If the column designates 16 data types, 8 columns are
created.
d) I/O classification: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses as
classified into input (I) and output (O).
e) It displays 1 address using the 5th bit of %MW1 as the output.
f) It displays 1 address using %MW2 as the input.

Viewing used address


To view a used address:

Step Action
1 Click View > Used Address.
2 Select a desirable address on the Used I/O Selection Dialog window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 191


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.2. Used address

Step Action

The field description for Used I/O Selection Dialog window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Area Selection Selects an address area. The available areas


are All.

Address Type Selection Selects an address type, Bit.

ATTENTION
− Select Update Used Address on the context menu to display the
used addresses
− Editing the program after Used Address is executed, does not update
the content of the Used Address automatically. If you want to see the
Used Address of edited program, again select Update Used
Address.

View address uses


Double-click the cell where the used I/O figures are displayed or click View Address
Uses from the context menu. The View Address Uses window displays.
The field description for View Address Uses are as follows:

Field Label Description

PLC Displays the PLC name with the applicable Address


used.

Address used It is the Address that the View Address Uses window
shows.

Program Displays the program name with the applicable Address


used.

Address Displays the address used in the program.

Type Displays the address type used in the program.

IN/OUT Displays whether the address is used as Input or


Output.

Instruction Displays the instruction type of operand for which the


applicable address is used. (Displayed as identical as

192 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Field Label Description


the instruction tool bar of LD editor.)

Position Displays the position in the program.

Comment Displays the comment of a selected address.

Go To The function to go to the program using the address of a


selected line.

8.3 Check program


This function is used to check the prepared LD program for errors. The following items
are checked.
− Logic Error: checks for LD connection errors.
− Grammar Error: checks for grammatical errors used in SBRT/CALL,
FOR/NEXT, and so on.
− Duplicated Coil Error: checks for errors if duplicate output items are used.

Check program setting


To check a program setting:

Step Action
1 Click View > Check Program. The Program Check window displays. By
default, Program Check tab is selected.

The field description for Program Check window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Program Check Tab

Logic Error Used to check for program’s logic errors such as


LD connection errors and short circuit.

Grammar Error Used to check for errors in the application


instructions such as CALL/SBRT,
MCS/MCSCLR, and so on.

Unreferenced label Used to specify the processing range of the


declared label which was not used. You can
select Ignore, Warning or Error.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 193


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Step Action

Unreferenced Used to specify the processing range of the


subroutine declared subroutine which was not used. You
can select Ignore, Warning or Error.

Duplicated coil error Used to check for the Duplicated Coil error.

Strict check on data Used to select Error or Warning for the


type Duplicated Coil.

Check program size Displays program size when checking.

Report unused Displays unused variables when checking.


variables

Current program Used to check the current program only.


(modbus)

All programs Used to check all the programs listed on the


current PLC item.

Duplicate Coil Check Tab

Checking Address Sets the address and variable area to check.


Specification

Checking Option Designates whether to check duplicated coil


for a function (block) output.

OK Click to save the setting and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
• Ignore: Used to ignore errors.

• Warning: If any error occurs, a Warning is displayed on the Result


Window and writing a program on PLC is available.
• Error: If any error occurs, Error is displayed on the Result Window and
writing a program on PLC is unavailable.

194 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
− For additional details on Logic Error and Grammar Error, refer to
Logic error and Grammar error.
− If the current program is selected while one or more programs are
listed on the current PLC item, CALL/SBRT is not checked.
− When writing a program on the PLC, all the items except the
Duplicated Coil are always checked even if it is not specified by the
user.
− In the 2MLI series of PLC, many programs can be added to the PLC
item and the SBRT call is available between programs.

ATTENTION
− Set coil (-(S)-) and Reset coil (-(R)-) are not checked for Duplicate
Coil.
− In the Function (block) output check, the range is determined by the
parameter type.

Check result trace


If any error occurs on the program, its details are displayed on the Program Inspect tab of
the message window. Double-click the error details to move to the location where the
error occurs.

Logic error
It is used to check for any logic error, and displays its details and location.
1. L0000: Input or output is not connected. This error occurs if the contact point is not
connected with the power line.

Action: Correct the LD program to prevent an input-output disconnect.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 195


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

2. L0100: It is a short circuit. This error occurs if the area connected with the OR is
connected with the horizontal line without the contact point.

Action: Delete OR if the OR connection is not necessary any more, or enter the contact
point in the applicable location.

3. L0200: Address or variable is not input. This error occurs if the address or variable
is not input in the contact point or coil.

Action: Input a proper address in the contact point or coil where the error occurs.

4. L0300: OR-LOAD incorrectly connected. This error occurs if OR-LOAD is


connected incorrectly.

196 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Search for OR-LOAD incorrectly connected and then correct the LD program.

5. L0400: Specified number of contact points is exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous LOAD instructions exceeds 32.

Action: Correct the LD program to limit the LOAD instructions within 32.
6. L0401: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input necessary is nonexistent.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 197


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Add the necessary input to the input terminal.

7. L0402: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input unnecessary is existent.

Action: Delete the input unnecessary from the input terminal.

8. L0404: The maximum number of MPUSH exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous MPUSH/MPOP exceeds 16.

198 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Correct the LD program to limit the continuous MPUSH/MPOP to 16.


9. L0406: Application instruction in error. This error occurs if the application
instruction is not existent in the 2MLI series PLC used.

Action: Replace the instruction with the one provided by the 2MLI series of PLC.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 199


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
This error occurs if GMWIN series PLC project file is converted to 2MLI
project.

Grammar error
This function is used to check for grammar related errors generated when an application
instruction is used.
1. E1001: Label declared as duplicate. This error occurs if duplicated LABEL is used.

Action: Delete the duplicated label, or change the name of the label.
• E1002: Label Name is nonexistent. This error occurs if JMP is used to refer to the
nonexistent label.

Action: Add the label where the error occurs, or correct the JMP instruction which uses
the label.

• E1003: Label Name is not used. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used
in the program.

200 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Delete the label, or add the application JMP instruction.

• E1004: Label Name not used in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP
instruction is not used in the program.

Action: Delete the label in the subroutine, or add the application JMP instruction.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 201


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
− The error number E1003/E1004 occurs only when Warning or Error
is selected for the label not referred in the ‘Grammar Error’, not
selected in the View > Check Program option. For additional
information, refer Check program.

• E1005: Label Name is nonexistent in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP
instruction uses the label nonexistent in the subroutine.

Action: Add the label in the subroutine, or correct the JMP instruction.

• E2001: Return instruction is nonexistent in the subroutine, Subroutine Name. The


subroutine is finished with the RET instruction.

Action: Add the RET instruction in the subroutine block.

202 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

• E2010: Subroutine call is nonexistent. The call of nonexistent SBRT causes an error.

Action: Add the SBRT~RET blocks of the subroutine name to call.

• E2003: Subroutine Name is positioned prior to END instruction. SBRT and RET
positioned prior to END instruction causes an error.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 203


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Move the application instructions SBRT and RET to the position after the end of
the instruction.

• E2011: Subroutine not used. Although SBRT~RET blocks exist, no CALL


instruction is available to use the applicable subroutine.

Action: Delete the subroutine not being used, or add the CALL instruction.

204 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
− The error number E2011 occurs only when Warning or Error is
selected for the subroutine not referred to in the Grammar Error
Inspect item. For additional information, refer Check program.

• E2012: Subroutine declared as duplicate. Subroutine Name: An identical name of


the subroutine cannot be used.

Action: Change the duplicated name of the subroutine.

• E2014: The maximum number of subroutines exceeded. Based on the PLC type, the
maximum number of subroutines is exceeded.
Action: Check the number of the subroutines used.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 205


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
− The maximum number of subroutines usable depends on the PLC
type. For details, refer to 2MLI CPU user’s guide.

• E3001: Equal number of NEXT unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions


are not equal, it causes this error.

Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be the same.

• E3002: Equal number of FOR unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions


are not equal, it causes this error.

Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be identical.

206 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

• E3003: FOR-NEXT cannot be nested more than 16 times. FOR/NEXT can be


duplicated up to 16 blocks. If the number of the duplicated FOR/NEXT blocks
exceeds 16, it causes an error.

Action: Limit the number of the FOR/NEXT blocks not to exceed 16.
• E3004: Between FOR-NEXT, RET or END is not available. If RET or END is
included between FOR and NEXT, it causes an error.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 207


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Change the location of the END and RET instruction positioned between
FOR/NEXT blocks.
• E3005: BREAK singly used. BREAK instruction can be used only between
FOR/NEXT blocks.

Action: Change the location of BREAK instruction.


• 00002: needs one or more scan program. There is no scan program in the current
PLC item, which causes an error.
Action: Add an applicable program item to the Project Scan Program.
• 00003: There is no program to check. There is no program in the current PLC item.
Action: Add a scan program and try again.
• E1300: An element (instruction) not available in user-defined function (UDF).

Action: The function block and positive (negative) transition pulse contact point (coil)
are not available in UDF.

208 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

ATTENTION
− The elements cannot be inserted in UDF Edit but they can be
inserted by using Paste and other functions in other programs.

• E1310: The return value needs at least, one or more outputs.


Action: The VAR_RETURN type variable is not designated in UDF, which causes an
error. Check whether the variable is used in the program.
• E1400: needs the TRANS output.
Action: TRANS variable is not designated as the output in the SFC Transition Program
created by LD, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used as output in the
program.
• E5000: Needs one or more INIT_DONE instruction to end the initialization task.
Action: Although the initialization task is added, the conditions to end the initialization
task are not designated. To normally end the scan program, the conditions to end the
initialization task must be designated.
• L0700: Undeclared variable
Action: The variable used as the IO parameter of contact point, coil, and function
(Block) is not declared. Check whether the variable is declared in the local variable.
• L0701: Input unsuitable data type.
Action: The type of used address or variable is not suitable. Check the type of used
address or variable.
• L0702: Invalid input connection

Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. The
input here needs a non-BOOL type input.
• L0703: Function (block) cannot have more than one input line.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 209


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: Check the connection to ensure that the Function (block) does not have more
than one input line.
• L0704: Invalid output connection

Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. Since
line cannot be connected to other type but BOOL, check the line output.
• L0705: Function (block) must not have more than one output line.

Action: Function (block) must not have more than one output line. Check the line
connection.
• L0706: Incorrect function IO type.

210 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

Action: In case of the function (block) having ANY type as the IO parameter, the data
type of IO parameter indicated as ANY type must be the same. Check the data type of the
input IO parameter.

ATTENTION
− If the strict data type check is not set in the program check options, it
checks the only IO parameter size of the function (block).

• L0707: The size of array is not same.


Action: The size of array used in MOVE function as the IO parameter must be same.
• L0708: Unknown function.
Action: Unavailable function. Check whether the function is user-defined function.
• L0709: Instance name is omitted.
Action: The instance name is omitted in the function block. Check the input items.
• L0710: Instance type is not the same.
Action: The instance type of function block is not identical with the function block.
Check the input items.
• L0711: Undeclared instance.
Action: The function block instance is not declared in the local variable. Declare the
function block instance in the local variable before use.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 211


January 2011 Honeywell
8. Programming
8.3. Check program

212 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.1 Find address
The Find/Replace function is used to find or change the address and the string in LD,
SFC, and Variable/Comment of SoftMaster.
Perform the following steps to find an address.
Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays.

The field description for Find Address window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Find what Used to specify the address to find.

Include all sub- Used to select the address type containing the address
addresses/vari to find. Then, if you select the checkbox, it finds
able names %IB0.1.0, %IW0.1.0, %IL0.1.0, and others containing
%IX0.1.1.

Output to pane SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The result
2 displays in Find 1 result window, but if you select the
Output to pane 2, the result displays in Find 2 result
window.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or downward


from the line currently selected in the respective editor.

Range Selects to find by designating a specific line after


designating the direction. If Range is selected, the start
and end lines must be also entered.

Find Next Finds the detail specified, next to the line (position)
currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the
position where the applicable address is located is
selected.

Find All Finds all the details specified above to display the result
on the find result window.

Advanced>> It is only applicable in LD editor. Click Advanced>> to


expand the selection. Used to find specific contact point,
coil, extended function, and function/function block used
in LD editor.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 213


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find address

Step Action

ATTENTION
− The result is displayed on the find window only with Find All run.
− Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, it is
insignificant to select the direction.
− Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.
− Advanced>> (extension) is as shown in the following figure.

Find next address


It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable in
common.
Based on LD, details of this function are described as follows:
Perform the following steps to find the next address.

Step Action
1 Select the basic cell of the direction.
2 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays.
3 Specify the address to find, the direction, and the options.
4 Click Find Next. If address is found identical to the detail as specified on the
dialog box, move to the address whose cell is identical.

214 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text

ATTENTION
− If no address identical to the specified address is found, the following
message appears.

− Find Next finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address find dialog box displays. If the direction is set
Downward, it starts finding the address from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.

Find all address


It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, and Local Variable in common.
Based on LD, the details of this function are described and perform the following steps to
find all addresses.
Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays.
2 Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.
3 Click Find All. Find All yields its result on the find message window as in the
following figure.

4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.

ATTENTION
Find All finds the address in all the programs included in the current PLC.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 215


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text

9.2 Find text


Finding text
This function is used to find the String of Rung Comment, Variable, Variable Comment,
Application Instruction, and Label.
It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable.
Based on LD, the details of this function are described as follows:
Perform the following steps to find text.

Step Action
1 Select the basic cell of the direction.
2 Click Find/Replace > Find Text. The Find String window displays.

The field description for Find String window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Find what: Used to specify the String to find.

Match whole word only Selecting All Identical finds the string exactly
identical to the string specified in detail to find. If
it is not selected, it also finds the string where
the detail to find is included.

Case-sensitive Selecting this option finds the string exactly


identical to the string.

Output to pane 2 SoftMaster has two find result windows. The


result displays in the Find 1 result window, but if
you select the Output to pane 2, the result
displays in Find 2 result window.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or


downward from the line currently selected in the
respective editor.

Find Next Finds the detail specified, next to the line


(position) currently selected. If the applicable
String is found, the position where the
applicable String is located is selected.

Find All Finds all the details specified to display the


result in the Find result window.

216 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text

Step Action

Range If Range is selected, Find String is run in a


specific step. If you select Range, you must
enter the start and last steps.

Advanced>> It is only applicable in LD editor. Click


Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to
close the selection. It is used to find specific
contact point, specific coil and application
instruction used in LD editor.
3 Specify the String to find, the selection options, and the direction.
4 Click Find Next. If a string identical to the specified detail is found on the
dialog box, it moves to the string whose cell is identical.

ATTENTION
− If no string identical to the specified string is found, the following
message appears.

− Find Next finds the current programs based on the selected cell
when the String Find dialog box displays. If the direction is set
Downward, it begins finding the String from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.

ATTENTION
− The result is displayed on the Find windows 1 or 2 only when Find All
is run.
− Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, the
direction is not significant to select.
− Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 217


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text

Find all text


It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.
Perform the following steps to find a particular text.

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Find String. The Find String window displays.
2 Specify the string to find, the selection options, and the direction.
3 Click Find All. Find All displays the results on the find message window as in
the following figure.

4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.

ATTENTION
Find All finds the string in all the programs included in the current PLC.

218 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address replacement

9.3 Address replacement


Replace address
This function is used to change the address previously made in LD Editor, IL Editor, or
Variable/Comment Editor.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment. This function is used to find
a previously created address. Details of this function are described as follows based on
LD.
Perform the following steps to replace an address.

Step Action
1 Select the basic cell of the direction.
2 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window
displays.
3 Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 219


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address replacement

Step Action

The field description for Replace Address window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Find what Used to specify the address to find.

Replace with Used to specify the address to replace with.

Find including lower If you select the checkbox when finding the
type address containing the address input in Find
With, it finds %IB0.1.0, %ID0.1.0, %IL0.1.0
and others including %IX0.1.1.

Replace with range Used to replace with a range. If the number of


address and the range matches the addresses
can be changed instantly.

Include Variable Selects whether to replace the


variable/comment of the input address with the
variable/comment of the address to replace.
That is, selects whether to replace with the
variable/comment of the address.

Range Designates the number of address for replace


with range. It is activated only if you select the
checkbox, Replace with range.

Area Selects whether to include by address types. If


hanging %IL0.0.1, for instance, they can be
replaced with range by selecting bit, byte, word
and double word less than L area,
respectively.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or


downward from the line currently selected in
the corresponding editor.

Range If selecting Range, Address Change can be


run within a specific line. If you select Range,
you must enter the start and last lines.

Find Next Finds the details specified, in the next to the


line (position) currently selected. If the
applicable address is found, the position where
the applicable address is located is selected.

Replace Replaces the address as specified above

220 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address replacement

Step Action
based on the currently selected position (line).

Replace All Replaces all the details specified above after


found.

Advanced>> It is only used in Ladder editor. Click


Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to
close the selection. It is used to find specific
contact point, specific coil and extended
function/function block used in Ladder editor.

4 Click Replace. The selected cell is replaced with the address specified for
replacement.

ATTENTION
− Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected
to the last of the programs, and then the address identical, again from
the first of the programs to the basic cell.
− The direction need not be selected in case of Replace All.
− If Replace with range is selected, Replace All only is available.

− Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.

Replace all addresses


It is used for the LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. This is used to find
the previously created address.

Replacing all addresses


Perform the following steps to replace all addresses.

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window.
2 Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.
3 Click Replace All.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 221


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address replacement

Step Action
4 Once the Replace All is completed in the current program, the following
message appears.

Replace with range


It is used to change consecutive addresses in bulk. For example, the addresses of %MX1
~ %MX10 can be changed to %MX100 ~ %MX109.
Example, if the detail to find is %MX1, the detail to change %MX100 and the number of
address is 10.
Perform the following steps to replace the number of addresses with a range:

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address.
2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the type and the direction, Select
Replace with Range check box and then enter the number of addresses to
replace with range.
3 Click Replace All.

ATTENTION
Replace with range is available only for the addresses, not for the constants.

222 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.4. Text replacement

9.4 Text replacement


Replace text string
This function is used to find and replace the text string of Comment, Variable, and so on,
except the address.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor in common. It is used
to find the previously created addresses. Based on LD, the details of this function are
described as follows.

ATTENTION
Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.

Perform the following steps to replace a string.


Step Action
1 Select the basic cell of the direction.
2 Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays.
3 Specify the String to find and replace the selection options and the direction.

The field description for Replace String window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Replace With Used to specify the string to find.

Find What Used to specify the string to replace.

Match whole If Match whole word only is selected, it finds the


word only string exactly identical to the string specified.

Case-sensitive If you select this check box, it finds the string only
exactly identical to the string with case-sensitive
characters sorted out. If not selected, it finds the
string in characters not sorted out.

Include variable If you select this check box, the variable is also
replaced as applicable when the string is replaced. If
this is not selected, the variable is not included in the
replace when the string is replaced.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or


downward from the line currently selected in the
respective editor.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 223


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.4. Text replacement

Step Action

Range If you select a range, replace string can be run within


a specific line. If you select Range, you must enter
the first and last steps.

Find Next Finds the detail specified, in the next to the line
(position) currently selected. If the applicable string is
found, the cell moves to the position where the
applicable string is located.

Replace Replaces the detail specified above after found.

Replace All Replaces all the details specified have been found.

Advanced>> It is only used in Ladder editor. Click Advanced>> to


expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is
used to find specific contact point, specific coil,
extended function, function/function block used in
Ladder editor.
4 Click Replace. The selected string is replaced with the string specified for
replacement.

ATTENTION
− Replace is available only when the string of the cell currently
selected is identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog
box.
− Click Replace to move to the next cell identical to the detail to find as
specified on the dialog box regardless of the execution of Replace.
− Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box displays.
− Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected
to the last of the programs, and then the address identical again from
the first of the programs to the basic cell.
− Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the Replace String dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the string identical from the cell selected to
the last of the programs, and then again from the first of the programs
to the basic cell.

224 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.5. Find again

Replace all string


It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. It is used to find the
previously created address.
Perform the following steps to replace all strings.

Step Action
1 Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays.
2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the selection options and the direction.
3 Click Replace All.
4 If Replace All is complete in the current program, the following message
appears for you to decide to Replace in the other programs.

9.5 Find again


Find Again is used to find the details of Find Address or Find String again if once run
previously. If Find was not run previously, it is inactive.
• Select Find/Replace > Find Again.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 225


January 2011 Honeywell
9. Find/Replace
9.5. Find again

226 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.1 Basic parameter
Basic parameter setting
It is used to specify the basic parameters related with the PLC operation.
To access Basic Parameter settings:

Step Action
1 On the project tree, double-click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic
Parameter Setting window displays.
2 The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Basic Operation Setup
window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Fixed period operation Used to decide to run the PLC program based
on the fixed period operation or based on the
scan time. Type the operation time in ms unit.

Watchdog timer Used to specify the time value of the scan


watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due
to program error.

Standard Input Filter Used to specify the standard input value. For
more details, refer Detailed module information
setting.

Restart Method Sets the restart mode. Select either cold or


warm restart.

Disable the reset When this option is selected, the switch is


switch moved to left side and return to normal position.

Disable the overall When this option is selected, the switch is


reset switch moved to left side and pressed it for more than
3 seconds and then returns to normal position.

Output during Used to decide to output the data to the module


debugging as usual or not even while being debugged.

Keep Output when an Used to decide to output the data to the module
error occurs as usual or not even when an error or a specific
input occurs.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 227


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic parameter

Step Action

Keep Output when Used to decide to output the data to the module
converting RUN- as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
>STOP changes from RUN to STOP.

Keep Output when Used to decide to output the data to the module
converting STOP- as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
>RUN changes from STOP to RUN.

Save the latest SOE Used to save the most recent SOE events.
events

Save the first SOE Used to save the first SOE event.
events

Disable the D.CLR When this option is selected, the switch is


reset switch moved to right side and return to normal
position. The general data area and retain area
(M, Automatic variable) is cleared.

Disable the overall When this option is selected, the switch is


D.CLR reset switch moved to left side and pressed it for more than
3 seconds and then returns to normal position.
The general data area, retain area (M,
Automatic variable) and R area are cleared.

228 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic parameter

Step Action
3 Retain Area Setup: Sets the options necessary for Retain Area in the Basic
Parameter information.

M area Retain setting: Sets the M area (retain area) to preserve the data
when PLC is restarted.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 229


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic parameter

Step Action
3 Error Operation Setup tab: Specifies the operation method when an error
occurs on the PLC.

The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Error Operation Setup
window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Continue running If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if


when a fuse error an error occurs on the fuse connection status of
occurs the module during PLC RUN.

Continue running If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an
when an I/O module error occurs on an I/O module during PLC RUN.
error occurs

Continue running If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an
when a special module error occurs on the special module during PLC
error occurs RUN.

Continue running If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an
when a communication error occurs on the communication module.
module error occurs

Continue running If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an
when an extended error occurs in the extended base.
base error occurs

TIP
Configure the Snet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in
serial mode.

Configure the FEnet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in
TCP mode.

The above settings are accomplished on an extra port in the CPU which is
exclusively for Modbus Server in the Serial Mode which eliminates the need
for using extra Snet or FEnet module. Refer to the 2MLI CPUU guide to
check whether your CPU supports this additional option.

230 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic parameter

ATTENTION
Restart Mode

Restart mode is used to define the restart method of CPU when a Restart
command is issued to the CPU.
− Cold Restart

To initiate a cold restart, set the restart mode as cold restart.

All data is cleared and the initial value of variables is set to zero.

Even though the parameter is set to warm restart mode, it starts in cold
restart mode when it is run just after the program is changed.

Pressing RESET switch during operation (same with online reset instruction),
starts in the cold restart mode, regardless of the restart mode set in the
parameter.
− Warm Restart
1. It is run when setting the restart mode of the parameter as warm restart.
2. In case of a warm restart, the following happen:
− The data set to remain the previous value.

− The data set only with the initial value are set with the initial values.
− All other data is cleared to ‘0’.
3. If data is abnormal although the parameter is set in the warm restart
(data preservation against interruption is not available), it is run in the
cold restart mode.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 231


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

10.2 I/O parameters


Setting I/O parameters
It is used to specify the I/O type configured in the PLC slot and to set the applicable
parameters for each slot.
To access I/O Parameters settings:

Step Action
1 On the project tree, double-click Parameter > I/O Parameters. The I/O
Parameter Setting window displays.
2 The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows:

Field Label Description

All Base Displays base module information and module


information per slot. In case module is not
designated in slot, it is displayed as ‘Default’.

Set Base Displays the already set base.

Module List Displays the base module information and the


module information based on slots. If no module
is configured in the slot.

Slot Information Edits or displays base’s module type for each


slot.

Delete Slot Deletes all information of the currently selected


slot.

Delete Base Deletes all information of the currently selected


base.

Base Setting Sets base number of currently selected base.

Delete All Deletes the configured module and information


of all bases.

Details Displays detailed module information.

Print Prints the module type and the module’s


parameter information specified in the slot.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the dialog


box.

232 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Step Action

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

ATTENTION
− The 2MLI project type supports the only fixed allocation type.
Therefore, the allocation information column is always displayed as
disabled.
− Fixed point assignment and variable point assignment are available
for the module assignment method. The fixed point assignment
assigns 64 points collectively to a slot while the variable point
assignment depends on the module type. Exceptionally 32 points is
assigned to the special/communication module, and 16 points to the
empty slot.

− The table below shows the differences between variable assignment


and fixed assignment, based on the basic base.

Variable
Slot Module Name Fixed Assignment
Assignment

0 16-point Input P00000 ~ P0000F P00000 ~ P0003F

1 16-point Output P00010 ~ P0001F P00040 ~ P0007F

2 A/D Module P00020 ~ P0002F P00080 ~ P0011F

Communication
3 P00030 ~ P0003F P00120 ~ P0015F
Module

4 16-point Output P00050 ~ P0005F P00200 ~ P0023F

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the communication module information setting,
refer SoftMaster-NM User’s Guide.

For additional information on the positioning module, refer APM User’s Guide.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 233


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Base module setup

Setting the information for a base module


It is used to specify the base information about a module.
Perform the following steps to set the Base Module Information.

Step Action
1 Select the base module to specify from the address list (Base 00 to Base 07).
2 Right-click and select Base Setting or click Base Setting. The Base Module
Setup window displays.

The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Slot Used to enter the maximum number of slots in


the base.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
• If the specified number of slots is less than the maximum number of
slots, the remaining area is not unavailable for editing.

Delete base module


Perform the following steps to delete the Base Module Information:

Step Action
1 Select the base module to delete from the address list.
2 Right-click and select Delete Base.
3 You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click OK to delete the information
of the applicable base module.

234 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Module information setting based on slots


Module type and detailed module information is described based on slots.
Perform the following steps to set the module information settings based on slots:

Step Action
1 Select the slot to specify the module in the slot information.
2 Select the Module from the drop-down list or right-click and select Edit to
view the list of modules.

This is applicable only when a module is already configured in the slot.


3 Select the module from the list.

ATTENTION
The module description can contain a maximum of 128 English characters.

I/O parameter edit function


Data editing details of Copy, Cut and Paste, based on slots is described as follows:

Copy/paste
Perform the following steps to copy and paste a selected slot.

Step Action
1 Select the slot to copy.
2 Right-click the module and select Copy.
3 Select the slot to paste.
4 Right-click and select Paste.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 235


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Cut/paste
Perform the following steps to cut and paste a selected slot.

Step Action
1 Select the slot to cut.
2 Right-click and select Cut.
3 Select the slot to paste.
4 Right-click and select Paste.

Undo
Perform the following steps to undo a particular action.

Step Action
1 Select the slot to delete.
2 Right-click and select Delete.
3 Right-click and select Undo.

ATTENTION
A maximum of 20 last actions can be revoked using the Undo feature.

Redo
To redo a particular action:
• Right-click and select Redo.

ATTENTION
− A maximum of 20 actions can be revoked or invoked using the Undo
and Redo functions.
− The shortcut keys used in I/O Parameters Edit cannot be used as the
user-defined shortcut key specified in SoftMaster.
− Click once on a slot to select one slot. To select multiple slots, click
on a slot and drag it down to multiple slots.

236 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Detailed module information setting


Double-click or click Details to view the detailed module information setting.

Input module setting


Perform the following steps to set input module setting.
Step Action
1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting
window displays.
2 Double-click an input module. The Input Module Setting dialog box displays.

The field description for Input Module Setting dialog box are as follows:

Field Label Description

Filter Used to specify the filter constant value for


the input.

OK Click to save the specified details and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 237


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

ATTENTION
− Digital module with the input of AC cannot specify the filter value.

− Standard value of the input filter is specified in basic parameters. For


more information, refer to Basic parameter.
− The input filter used for checking the input signal does not change for
the filtering time. The following figure is with the input filter value of
3ms. As the input signal is the same for 3ms from the moment
detected, it is processed as normal input signal after 3ms.

Output module
Perform the following steps to set output module setting.
Step Action
1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter Setting
window displays.
2 Double-click an output module. The Output Module Setting dialog box
displays.

238 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Step Action

The field description for Output Module Setting dialog box are as follows:

Field Label Description

Channel One channel is assigned for 8 points, and the


emergency output mode can be specified per
channel.

OK Click to save the specified details and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting.

ATTENTION
− Emergency output value is specified when the CPU is abruptly
stopped during RUN.
− Default for the emergency output is Hold.

Module reservation
It assigns the points of the module only without any specific module specified. The 16,
32, and 64 points are available for the assignment.

Analog Input module


On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Analog Input module and then click
Details to view the Parameter Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set Analog Input module setting.
Step Action
1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting
window displays.
2 Double-click an A/I module. The Analog Input Module Setting dialog box
displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 239


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Step Action

The field description for Analog Input Module Setting dialog box are as
follows:

Field Label Description

All Parameters Settings If you select this option, it changes all the
channels’ applicable parameter values.

Maximum/Minimum If the user inputs data, an applicable range


Value Display displays on the lower-half of the dialog box
automatically. If the user changes the
parameter value to any other value other than
the default, the string color changes from
Black to Blue.

OK Click to save the specified details and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting.

The parameter values are as follows:


Parameter Setting Items Default

Channels Disable/Enable Disable

1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V (Voltage Type) 1~5V


Input Range
4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type) 4~20mA

0~16000/-8000~8000/1000-5000/0~10000% 0~16000
Output Type
(Input range changes based on items)

Filter Process Disable/Enable Disable

Filter Constants 1-99 1

Average Process Disable/Enable Disable

Average Method Count Average/Time Average Count Average

Average Value Count Average: 2-64000, Time Average: 4- 2


16000

240 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Analog output module


On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select Analog Output module and then click
Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set Analog Output module setting.
Step Action
1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting
window displays.
2 Double-click an A/O module. The Analog Output Module Setting dialog box
displays.

The field description for Analog Output Module Setting dialog box are as
follows:

Field Label Description

All Parameters Settings If you select this option, it changes all the
channels’ applicable parameter values.

Maximum/Minimum If the user inputs data, an applicable range


Value Display displays on the lower-half of the dialog box
automatically. If the user changes the
parameter value to any other value other than
the default, the string color changes from
Black to Blue.

OK Click to save the specified details and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.


3 Click OK to apply the setting

The parameter values are as follows:


Parameter Setting Items Default

Channels STOP/RUN STOP

1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/- 1~5V
10~10V (Voltage Type)
Output Range 4~20mA
4~20mA/0~20mA
(Current Type)

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 241


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Parameter Setting Items Default

0~16000/-
8000~8000/1000-
Input Type 5000/0~10000% 0~16000
(changes based on output
range)

Channel Output Type Previous/minimum/middle Previous Value


/maximum Value

High-speed counter module


On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select High Speed counter module and then
click Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set high-speed counter module setting.
Step Action
1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting
window displays.
2 Double-click a high speed counter module. The High-Speed Counter
Module Setting dialog box displays.

The field description for High-Speed Counter Module Setting dialog box are
as follows:

Field Label Description

Parameter Area If you select this option, it changes all the


channels’ applicable parameter values.

Maximum/Minimum If the user inputs data, an applicable range


Value Display displays on the lower-half of the dialog box
automatically. If the user changes the
parameter value to any other value other than
the default, the string color changes from
Black to Blue.

OK Click to save the specified details and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.


3 Click OK to apply the setting.

242 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

The parameter values are as follows:


Parameter Setting Items Default

Counter Mode Linear Counter/Ring Counter Linear Counter

2-phase 1-multiplier/2-phase 2-
multiplier/

2-phase 4-multiplier/CW-CCW/
2-phase
Pulse Input Mode 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplier/
1-multiplier
1-phase 1-input 2-multiplier/

1-phase 2-input 1-multiplier/1-phase 2-


input 2-multiplier

N/A/Count clear/Count latch/

Sampling count/Measure input


Additional Function
frequency N/A
Mode
Measure rotations per unit time/Count
Disable

Range Value (ms) 0-60000 0

(Single Compare) less/(Single


Compare) less or equal/

(Single Compare) equal/(Single Compare) (Single Compare)


Compared Output 0
equal or greater/
Mode less
(Single Compare) greater/(Section
Compare) included/ (Section
Compare)excluded

Compared Output 1 (Single Compare)


As identical as specified above
Mode less

Preset Input Value -2147483648-2147483647 0

Ring Counter, -2147483648-2147483647 0


Minimum Value

Ring Counter, -2147483648-2147483647 0


Maximum Value

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 243


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Parameter Setting Items Default

Compared Output 0
Minimum Setting -2147483648-2147483647 0
Value

Compared Output 0
Maximum Setting -2147483648-2147483647 0
Value

Compared Output 1
Minimum Setting -2147483648-2147483647 0
Value

Compared Output 1
Maximum Setting -2147483648-2147483647 0
Value

Number of Pulses per


0-60000 0
Rotation

Frequency Display
1Hz/10Hz/100Hz/1000Hz 1Hz
mode

ATTENTION
“Pulse/Rev value” option among High-speed counter parameter option is
active when the Auxiliary Mode is set to “Revolution/Unit time”.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the communication module, see SoftMaster NM
Manual.

For additional information on the positioning module, see the APM manual.

244 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

I/O parameter print function


This function is used for printing the specified I/O parameter and detailed module
information specified.

Print option setting


To print the specified I/O parameter:
• On I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print window
displays.

a) Print All: Prints all I/O configuration table and detailed module information.
b) I/O Configuration Table: Prints I/O parameter's module setting details based
on slots, description and I/O information assigned.
c) Detailed Info of Each Module: Prints the detailed module information for the
specified slot module.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 245


January 2011 Honeywell
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters

Print preview
Perform the following steps to view the Print Preview.

Step Action
1 On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print
window displays.
2 On the Print window, click Preview.

Copy to clipboard
It is used for copying the I/O parameter table to the clipboard, thus to add onto the String
editor, word processor or spread sheet.
To copy the data to windows clipboard:
• On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Copy to Clipboard.

ATTENTION
Only I/O configuration table can be copied to clipboard.

246 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.1 Connection options for the PLC
It is used to specify the connection network with the PLC.

Local connection setting


RS-232C or USB connection is available for Local Connection Setting.
• Click Online > Connection Settings. The Online Settings window displays.
The field descriptions for Online Settings window are as follows:

Field Description

Type Used to specify communication media (RS-232C, USB, Ethernet, and


Modem) to connect to the PLC.

Depth Used to specify the connection configuration (Remote 1 and Remote


2) with PLC.

Connect Click to connect to PLC using the specified options.

Settings Allows detailed setting based on the selected Connection Type.

Preview Used to see a graphical preview of all Connect Options.

Timeout Time-out defines the time after which the attempt to establish
interval communication with the PLC is given up.

Retrial Defines the number of times to retry connecting to the PLC if


times communication connection fails.

Read/Write Used to specify the frame size of the data to transfer. This option is
data size in available only when the PLC operation is in Run mode. In other modes
PLC run of operation, data is transferred in the maximum frame size.
mode

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 247


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.1. Connection options for the PLC

Using the local RS-232C


Perform the following steps to connect through the local RS-232C.
Step Action
1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS-232C.
2 Click Setting to specify communication speed and communication COM port.
3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION
− Default is RS-232C COM1 with the communication speed of
115200bps.
− 38400bps and 115200bps available for communication speed.
− Communication speed is 115200bps for 2MLK Series.
− Communication ports of COM1 ~ COM8 are available.
− If USB serial device is used, a virtual COM port is applied to the
communication port. Check the device administrator to ensure the
specified port number.
− Connection in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM, address monitoring
and system monitoring are available with one PLC at the same time.
However, it is the same Connect Options.

248 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.1. Connection options for the PLC

Using the local USB


Perform the following steps to connect using the local USB.

Step Action
1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as USB.
2 USB has no detailed setting options. Hence Setting is disabled.
3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION
− USB device driver has to be installed for the USB to connect to the
PLC. Install the USB device driver before attempting to connect to the
PLC.
− The USB driver is automatically installed along with SoftMaster. For
more information, refer to Installing SoftMaster.

Remote 1 connect setting

Connecting using Ethernet


Perform the following steps to set the connection to Ethernet.

Step Action
1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Ethernet.
2 Click Setting to specify Ethernet IP.

Specify the IP address of the PLC CPU to be connected.


3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION
− IP is as specified in Ethernet communication module.
− The connection to PLC CPU can be tested using ping command from
PC.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 249


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.1. Connection options for the PLC

Modem connect
Perform the following steps to connect using the Modem.

Step Action
1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Modem.
2 Click Setting to specify modem details.

The field description for Details > Modem window are as follows:

Field Description

Modem Type Enter the modem type available to connect. Snet


communication module has exclusive modem
functions.

Port number Enter the modem’s communication port.

Baud rate Enter the modem’s communication speed.

Phone number Enter the phone number of the modem if it is a dial-


up modem.

Station number Enter the station number specified in the


communication module of Remote Step 1.

RS-232C or USB remote connect


Perform the following steps to connect to RS-232C or USB remotely.

Step Action
1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS-
232C/USB.
2 Select the Depth as Remote 1.
3 Click Settings and click the Remote 1 tab to specify Remote 1 settings.

The field description for Details > Remote 1 window are as follows:

Field Description

Network type Used to specify PLC communication module type for


remote connection, Snet, FEnet, and FDEnet are
available for the communication modules.

Base number Used to specify communication module’s base

250 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.1. Connection options for the PLC

Step Action
number of local PLC base.

Slot number Used to specify communication module’s slot number


of local PLC base.

Station number Used to input communication module’s specified


station number of Remote 1.

IP address Used to input communication module’s specified IP


address of Remote 1.

Snet channel Select the connection channel port if the


communication module of Remote.1 connection is
Snet module.

ATTENTION
− Only if the network type is FEnet, the IP address is active. If not, IP
address is inactive with the station number active.

− Base number of 0~7 and slot number of 0~15 is available.

Remote 2 connect setting

a) Network type: Used to specify PLC communication module type for remote
connection. Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication
modules.
b) Base number: Used to specify communication module’s base number of local
PLC base.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 251


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

c) Slot number: Used to specify communication module’s slot number of local


PLC base.
d) Station number: Used to input communication module’s specified station
Number of Remote 1.
e) IP address: Used to input communication module’s specified IP address of
Remote 1.

11.2 Online functions


Connect
This option is used to connect to the PLC based on the specified Connect Options.
Perform the following steps to connect to a PLC using a specified connection option.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect. The Connect window displays.
2 If connected to the PLC, the Online menu and Online status displays.
3 If a password has been setup in the PLC, you are prompted to enter the
Password.
4 Connection is established if the input password matches the PLC password.

ATTENTION
− If the connection to the PLC is fast, the window may appear and
disappear quickly while connecting.
− After the connection has been established, the PLC’s status displays
beside the project name on the project window and on the status display
line.
− If any other application program is already connected to the PLC, its
main online functions are not available.
− After the PLC is connected, connecting its cable to another PLC
disconnects the previous PLC automatically.
− When Disconnect is run, Monitor and Debug functions also end.

252 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

ATTENTION
− Check Points when connection fails.
1. RS-232C
• Check if RS-232C cable connection between Computer and PLC is
correct.
• Check if the COM port number of the computer matches with the COM
port number where the cable is connected.
• Check if the RS-232C cable connections are correct.
• Check if the status of PLC is normal.
2. USB
• Check if the USB cable connection between the Computer and PLC is
correct.

• Check if the computer identified the PLC as an USB device during the
connection.
a) Connect the computer and PLC with an USB cable.
For additional details, refer to Verifying the USB device driver
installation.

ATTENTION
a) Click Start>Run.
b) Enter command in the Run dialog box.
c) Run ping test for Ethernet module from the Command Prompt. Type
ping <IP address of CPU> and press Enter. If the Ethernet module
responds normally, the window shows the communication status. If
the Ethernet module does not respond, the window displays the Time
out message.

− Check if the status of PLC is normal.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 253


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Write
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments to the PLC.
Perform the following steps to transfer user programs, parameters and comment to the
PLC.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC via Online, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Write.

The Write window displays.


3 Select the data to transfer to the PLC and then click OK to start transferring
the selected data to PLC.

The field description for Write window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Selection Tree Selects the data to transfer to PLC.

OK Click to transfer the data to PLC.

Cancel Click to cancel writing of data.

a) Displays the current Write/Read item in progress.


b) Displays the data size of the item (current item’s size/ all items’ size).
c) Displays progressing rate of the current item.
d) Displays progressing rate of all items.
e) Displays progressing time elapsed until current.
f) Cancel: Stops transferring the data.

254 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

ATTENTION
− The special module parameter Write is available only when I/O
parameter Write is selected.
− Parameter Write takes more time during CPU RUN than in CPU
STOP mode.

Read
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the PLC to a current
project.
Perform the following steps to upload the data in PLC and to apply them to a new
project.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Read. The Read window displays.
3 Select items to upload from the PLC and click OK. The uploaded items are
applied to the current project.

A message is displays to confirm that the reading is complete.

ATTENTION
− For field descriptions, refer to Write.

Change mode
It is used to convert the operation mode of the PLC in operation.
Perform the following steps to change the PLC operation mode.

Step Action
1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Change Mode > Run/Stop/Debug.
3 PLC operation mode changes as selected by the user.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 255


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

ATTENTION
− Ensure that PLC’s remote dip switch is ON with the operation mode
dip switch as Stop.
− The program in the PLC must be same to that in the project to
convert to Debug mode.
− If changed from Stop to Run mode, a dialog box confirms the
program conversion to an executable code inside the PLC. This
dialog box may be visible up to 30s according to the program size.
− If changed to Run mode, the Performing Initialization Task dialog box
appears while the initialization task is run. After the initialization task
is complete or disconnected, the dialog box closes.
− If changed to Run or Debug mode, Run or Debug function may not
be normal if any error occurs on the PLC. Delete the PLC error first
and then change the operation mode.
− If Show Message when changing the PLC mode in the Tool >
Option > Online is not selected, the confirmation message is not
displayed when Mode Change instruction is run.

Compare with PLC


This function is used to compare the project in the PLC to the project open in SoftMaster.
Perform the following steps to compare projects.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Compare with PLC. The Compare with PLC window
displays.
3 Select an object to compare and then click Compare.

The field description for Compare with PLC window are as follows:

Field Description

Current project Refers to the project open in SoftMaster.

Compare Compares between the selected items.

PLC Refers to the project in the PLC.

256 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

ATTENTION
− Compare results displays on the Result window.

− For more details, refer to Comparing projects.

Reset PLC
This function is used to reset the PLC. Reset PLC is also possible using the ‘Reset PLC’
dip switch in the CPU module.
Perform the following steps to reset the PLC.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Reset PLC. The Reset PLC window displays.
3 Choose to perform a reset or an overall reset and click OK.

ATTENTION
− Reset: when PLC is powered again, it deletes all error/warning
information during power ON. Error/warning may occur again based
on the situation.

− Overall reset: when PLC is powered again, it clears error/warning


information; latch 1 area data, I/O skip, error mask, and forced I/O
setting area to allow power on.
− Beware of the fact that after reset, the PLC is OFF and then ON
again.

Clearing PLC data


It is used to clear user programs, parameters, comments, memory, and latch area in PLC.
To delete the saved data and latch area in PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.
2 Select Online > Clear PLC. The Clear – PLC window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 257


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action
3 Select items to delete and then click Clear to start Clear PLC.
4 Under the Clear Item tab, select items of the project saved in the PLC to be
deleted.
5 Click Clear to delete the selected items.
6 Select the Clear Memory tab to clear the selected memory area in the PLC.

The field description for Clear – PLC window are as follows:

Field Description

List of memory areas Shows the memory areas in PLC. Start/End


to select address to delete can be specified by the user.

Clear Deletes the selected items.

Select All Selects all the memory areas.

Reset All Cancels the selected memory area.

PLC information
You can view the information regarding the connected PLC. You can also set the
password and the PLC timer on the PLC Information window.

CPU information
This function allows checking the detailed information of the PLC CPU.
Perform the following steps to check the detailed information of PLC CPU.

Step Action
1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays.
3 Select the CPU tab. Shows the specified details and status of the connected
PLC CPU.
4 Click Close to close the window.

258 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

CPU performance
SoftMaster enables you to check the scan time of the PLC and memory application
status.
Perform the following steps to check the scan time and memory application status of
PLC.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays.
3 Select the Performance tab.

The field description for PLC Information > Performance window are as
follows:

Field Label Description

Scan Time Shows the Maximum/Minimum/Current scan


time of the connected PLC. If Fixed Cycle
Operation is set in the basic parameter, it
displays the fixed cycle.

Program Memory used Shows the downloaded programs’ size/all PLC


program areas’ size.

Details Shows the list of programs downloaded on the


PLC.

Upload Memory used Shows the downloaded comment’s size/all PLC


comment areas’ size.

Details Shows the list of comments saved in the PLC.


4 Click Details to view details of the Program Memory used. The list of all
saved programs and their size displays.

Password
The user password can be specified, changed or deleted to protect PLC information.
Perform the following steps to assign, change, and delete the user password.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 259


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action
1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays.
3 Select the Password tab.

The field description for PLC Information > Password window are as follows:

Field Description

Current Password Used to enter the password saved


in the PLC.

New password Used to enter a new password.

Confirm password Used to enter the New Password


again.

Delete Deletes the password of the PLC.

Change Changes the password of the PLC.

Setting password
Perform the following steps to set a new password.

Step Action
1 Enter a new password in New Password field.
2 Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field.
3 Click Change to set the new password in PLC.

Changing password
Perform the following steps to change an existing password.

Step Action
1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field.
2 Enter a new password in New Password field.
3 Enter the new password again in Confirm password field.

260 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action
4 Click Change to change the password of the PLC.

Deleting password
Perform the following steps to delete an existing password.

Step Action
1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field.
2 Click Clear to delete the PLC password.

ATTENTION
− The password can contain a maximum of eight alphabets. The
alphabets can be of upper case or lower case.
− Special characters can also be used for password.
− On setting a password for the PLC, you are prompted to enter
password when attempting to connect to the PLC. Only after
authentication of the password, the connection to the PLC is
established.

PLC RTC setting


It helps to set the RTC (Real Time Clock) of the PLC.
Perform the following steps to set the RTC of the PLC.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays.
3 Select the PLC RTC tab.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 261


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

The field description for PLC Information > PLC RTC window are as follows:

Field Label Description

State Shows PLC timer setting status. If the timer is


not specified, PLC time is not read.

Date Displays date.

Time Displays time.

Synchronize PLC with Synchronizes date and time between PC and


PC clock PLC.

Send to PLC Transfers user-specified time or synchronized


time to PLC.

PLC history
It displays the history data of error/warning, Change Mode and Shut down Log saved in
PLC.

Error log
Perform the following steps to view the error log.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays.
3 Select the Error Log tab.

262 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

The field description for PLC History > Error Log window are as follows:

Field Label Description

List Displays Error Log.

Details/Remedy Displays details of the error selected from the


history along with action to rectify the error.

Read All Reads and displays all PLC histories.

Clear all logs Deletes all logs entered.

Update Reads PLC history again.

Save Saves PLC history to a file.

Clear Deletes PLC history.

Close Closes the window.

Mode log
It shows the Mode Change Log of PLC operation modes.
Perform the following steps to view the Mode log.
Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays.
3 Select the Mode Log tab.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 263


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Shut down log


It shows the Shut down Log history of PLC.
Perform the following steps to view the Shut down log.
Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays.
3 Select the Shut Down Log tab.

ATTENTION
The shut down log also displays the base number where power shut down
occurred.

System log
It shows the history of tasks run by SoftMaster when the PLC is running.
Perform the following steps to view the System log.
Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays.
3 Select the System Log tab.

ATTENTION
− History data is arranged in chronological sequence.
− The history is saved as ‘.csv’ file. This file can be opened in MS Excel
or other String editing programs.
− Double-click the first column of the list to change sequence in
ascending/descending order.
− A maximum of 100 history data are displayed. Click Read All to read
more PLC histories. If the number of items in history is less than 100,
the Read All is disabled.

264 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

PLC error/warning
You can check the error/warning and previous error log currently saved in PLC.
Perform the following steps to check the error/warning and previous error logs in the
PLC.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > PLC Errors/Warnings. The PLC Error/Warning window
displays.

ATTENTION
− In case of an error/warning during connection or Online, the
Error/Warning window displays.
− If the error is an I/O parameter issue, I/O installation error, fuse error,
I/O Read/Write error, special communication module error, the
applicable error’s slot information displays.
− When a ‘Program Error’ (when the PLC mode is changed from Stop
to Run) or ‘Execution Program Error’ (when PLC is in Run mode)
occurs, if the SM project and the downloaded PLC program are
same, then double-click the area of program name to move to the
corresponding step in the program.

Flash memory setting


Flash memory operation of PLC can be configured using SoftMaster. When the operation
mode of the PLC mode changes to RUN, it runs the program after copying the program
in the flash memory to the program memory. In other words, it runs the PLC from the
program in the flash memory.

PLC operation in Run mode


PLC operation in RUN mode refers to the operation mode changes from STOP to RUN,
and that the operation mode is Run when PLC is powered ON.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 265


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Perform the following steps to view or change the flash memory settings.

Step Action
1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
2 Click Online > Set Flash Memory. The Flash Memory Run Mode Setup
window displays.

The field description for Flash Memory Run Mode Setup window are as
follows:

Field Label Description

Enable flash memory run A program is run from Flash memory.


mode

Disable flash memory run Cancels the flash memory’s operation


mode mode.

ATTENTION
− If a flash memory operation mode is specified, the program is copied
to the flash memory after Program Write or Modification Write during
Run.

− The flash memory operation mode setting is configured to recover the


program when PLC status is in error.

Force I/O setting


Force I/O of the I/O refresh area can be specified in PLC.
To specify a forced I/O and I/O refresh area in PLC:

Step Action
1 Click Online > Force I/O. The Force I/O Setup window displays.

The field description for The Force I/O Setup window are as follows:

266 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

Field Label Description

Module address Used to select an address by using base,


slot.

Forced Input Used to enable/disable Forced Input. Forced


input value per bit is applicable only when the
Forced Input is allowed.

Forced Output Used to enable/disable Forced Output.


Forced output value per bit is applicable only
when the Forced Output is allowed.

Apply Saves the changed items in the PLC without


closing the window.

Forced I/O Used to specify the flag and data for each bit.

Setting address list Displays the address with the Forced I/O flag
or data specified.

Delete Deletes the flag and data specified in the


selected address from the specified address
list.

Variable Names Displays the list of variable/comment.

Delete All Used to cancel the specified flag and data for
all areas.

Select All Used to specify the flag and data for all
areas.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− Obtaining Forced I/O information, takes around 5s at a speed of
115200bps with RS-232C connected, or about 1s with USB.
− The flag displays the Forced I/O application status for each bit. If you
select the flag, it means Enable, and if you do not select the flag, it
means Disable.
− The data displays the forced value. If selected, 1 is the forced value,

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 267


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

and if not, 0 is the forced value. However, it is effective only when the
flag is in Enable status.

Flag Data Forced Value

0 (not selected) 0 (not selected) X

0 (not selected) 1 (selected) X

1 (selected) 0 (not selected) 0

1 (selected) 1 (selected) 1

− Click Variable Names to display variables declared on I and Q


Address.
− In case of an output module having less than 64-channels, you can
specify the flag and data up to 64 channels.

Force I/O setting


Example: the 4th bit of Base 0, Slot 0 forced to output value 1, 8th bit to output value 0.
Step Action
1 Select base 0 and slot 0.
2 Select the flag and data of the bit 3. %QW0.0.0 is registered to the
established Address.
3 Select the flag of the bit 7. As the forced output value of the bit 7 is 0, no data
needs to be selected. Since %QW0.0.0 is already registered in the pre-set
Address, it is not added again.

268 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

4 Select the Forced Output Enable Flag and then click Apply to apply the
forced value.

Forced I/O cancel


Example: the 4th, 8th bit of Base0, Slot 0 forced value to cancel.

Step Action
1 Move to %QW0.0.0. Use the button or directly enter the area to move to.
2 Click the bit 3 and 7’s flag to cancel the forced output value.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 269


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

3 Click Apply.

ATTENTION
In program monitoring, the following are applicable:

− In the case of forced input, monitoring is displayed with the forced


value since the forced input value is updated in the monitor area.

− In the case of forced output, monitoring is not displayed since the


forced value is actually the output regardless of the calculation result.

Skip I/O setting


Skip is used to enable or disable IO Slots during the PLC operation.
Perform the following steps to skip I/O during a PLC operation.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Skip I/O. The Skip I/O Setup window displays.

270 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Step Action

The field description for Skip I/O Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Base Skip I/O Used to skip the base I/O. If the base
module is skipped, all slots in the base are
I/O skipped.

Slot Skip I/O Used to skip a particular IO.

Show Existing Base Only Shows existing base only

Details Displays detailed information of the special


module or the communication module.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Skip I/O setting for each slot


Perform the following steps to skip I/O setting for each slot.

Step Action
1 Select the base with the slot to specify Skip I/O.
2 Select the slot to specify the Skip I/O.
3 Select the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that ‘*’ appears
beside the base.
4 Click Yes to display the changed values.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 271


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Skip I/O cancel for each slot


Perform the following steps to cancel skip I/O for a slot.

Step Action
1 Select the base to cancel the Skip I/O.
2 Select the slot to cancel the Skip I/O.
3 Clear the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that the ‘*’mark
beside the base disappears if there is no slot where Skip I/O is specified in
the applicable base.

Base skip I/O setting


Perform the following steps to set base skip I/O.

Step Action
1 Select the base to specify the base Skip I/O.
2 Select the check box corresponding to the module.
3 Click OK. The changed values displays.
4 Click Yes to display changed values.

Base skip I/O cancel


Perform the following steps to cancel the base skip I/O.

Step Action
1 Select the base to cancel the base Skip I/O.
2 Clear the check box corresponding to the selected module. As the base Skip
I/O is cancelled, the Skip I/O for each slot can be specified or cancelled.
3 Click OK to apply the specified Skip I/O.
4 Click Yes to display the changed values.

272 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

Fault mask
It is used to configure whether the module must be run in Fault during PLC operation.
Perform the following steps to view fault mask setting.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Fault Mask. The Fault Mask Setup window displays.

The field description for Fault Mask Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Base Fault Mask Used to apply base fault mask. If


the base module’s mask is
specified, all slots in the base are
of the fault mask.

Slot Fault Mask Used to apply the fault mask for


each slot.

Show Existing Base Only Shows existing base only.

Details Displays detailed information about


the special module or the
communication module.

OK Click to save the changes and to


close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− Canceling the Fault Mask specified is identical as described in Skip
I/O setting. For more details, refer to Skip I/O setting.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 273


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.2. Online functions

ATTENTION
− The I/O Information window which is similar to Fault Mask or I/O skip
window when Online > I/O Information is selected. I/O Sync. is
activated only when the PLC is in STOP Mode.
− Click I/O Sync to synchronize the I/O Parameter of SoftMaster
project with the real module installation information. Be careful since
the previous I/O parameter will be erased.

274 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.3. Module changing wizard

11.3 Module changing wizard


This wizard is used to change the module while the PLC is in RUN mode.
Perform the following steps to change the module during PLC operation.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Module Changing Wizard. The Selecting Module window
displays.

The field description for Selecting Module window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the module selection


stage.

Base Module Tree Displays the base module.

Slot Modules List Displays the information of the slot installed


on the base module.

Back It is inactive while you select the module.


Used to move to the module selection stage.

Next It is active only if you select a module to


change. Used to move to the module
confirming stage.

Cancel Closes the Module Changing Wizard.


2 Select the module to change and then click Next. The Checking Module
window displays.

The field description for Checking Module window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the module


confirming stage.

Module Information Displays detailed information of the selected


module.

Back Used to move to the module selection stage.

Next Used to move to the module removing stage.

Cancel Closes the Module Changing Wizard.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 275


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.3. Module changing wizard

Step Action
3 Check the module to change.
4 Click Next, Remove Module window displays if the information displayed is
identical to the module to change. Click Back to go back to the previous
stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.

The field description for Removing Module window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the removing


module stage.

Back Used to move to the confirming stage of the


module removal.

Next Used to move to the module installation


stage.

Cancel Closes the Module Changing Wizard.


5 Remove the module physically.
6 After removing the module, click Next, the Changing Module Finished
window displays. Click Back to move back to the previous stage or click
Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
7 Install the module at the module installation stage.

The field description for Changing Module Finished window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Description Displays the comment of the module change


complete stage.

Back It is inactive since going back to previous stage is


unavailable after the module changed.

Finish Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.


8 After inserting the module, click Next. Click Back to move back to the
previous stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
9 Close the Module Changing Wizard.

276 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
11. Online
11.3. Module changing wizard

ATTENTION
− During Module removal using the wizard, if the module is not
removed, an error message appears.
− During Module installation using the wizard, if the module is not
installed, an error message appears.

ATTENTION
− If the Module Changing Wizard is cancelled, Fault Mask and Skip I/O
may continue to be active. Activate the Fault mask and Skip I/O to
operate the module again.

ATTENTION
To change the module without using the wizard, perform the following steps:
1. Set the Skip I/O for the module to change.
2. Set the Fault Mask for the module to change.
3. Remove the module from the PLC.
4. Install a new module.
5. Release the Skip I/O for the applicable module.
6. Click Online > PLC Error/Warning to check for any error on the
applicable module.
7. If no error is found on the applicable module, release the Fault Mask for
the module.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on Skip I/O and Fault Mask specified for the
module, refer to Skip I/O setting and Fault mask.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 277


January 2011 Honeywell
11. Online
11.3. Module changing wizard

278 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1 Monitoring
SoftMaster’s monitoring functions include: Start/Stop Monitoring, Pause, Resume,
Pausing Conditions, and Change Current Value.

Start/stop monitoring
Perform the following steps to start/stop monitoring.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.
2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Click Monitor > Stop
Monitoring to stop monitoring.
3 If LD or IL program is active, it goes to monitoring mode.

ATTENTION
When monitoring starts, correct value may not be monitored, if PLC program
and SoftMaster program are different.

Change current value


Selected address’s current value or forced I/O setting can be changed during monitoring.
Perform the following steps to change current value for a selected address.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.
2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
3 Select address or variable on the program or variable monitoring window.
4 Click Monitor > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value
window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 279


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring

Step Action

The field description for Change Current Value window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Name of the variable where current value is


changed.

Type Type of the variable where current value is


changed.

Range Available range of current value based on type.

Value On/Off Device On/Off specified if its type is BOOL.

Value Variable value specified if its type is not BOOL.

Forced I/O▼ Forced I/O setting available if variable is I/Q area


and BOOL type.

Flag It is used for Forced I/O setting.

OK It is used to transfer setting value to PLC.

Data Forced I/O data value is specified.

5 Enter Current Value in the window and click OK to change the current value.

280 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring

Step Action

ATTENTION
1. The default value is displayed based on the variable’s display type. In
other words, if it is displayed in hexadecimal when monitored, current
value changes to hexadecimal.
2. The value may not be entered according to its display type. In other
words, if displayed in hexadecimal, it can be entered as unsigned
decimal.
3. When you click OK, an error may occur due to ineffective input value or
range exceedance.
4. Hexadecimal input starts with “16#” shown in “16#1234”.
5. As for string type, current value (String) is entered between single
quotation marks (‘abcde’).
6. In case of WSTRING type, enter the current value (string) between
double quotation marks (“abcde”).
7. Only if variable is I/Q address and BOOL type, compulsory I/O is active.
8. If forced I/O is inactive, edit feature of current value and ON/OFF setting
is inactive.
9. Change Current Value and Forced I/O Setting are not run at a time.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information, refer to Force I/O setting.

Pause/restart monitoring
You can pause and restart monitoring.

Pause monitoring
Perform the following steps to pause monitoring.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.
2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
3 Click Monitor > Pause to stop monitoring momentarily.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 281


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring

Restart monitoring
Perform the following steps to restart monitoring.
• Select Monitor > Resume to restart monitoring.

ATTENTION
− PLC is in RUN mode, even if monitoring is momentarily stopped.

− You can only restart paused monitoring.


− Monitoring value is not renewed if the program window is moved with
Pause Monitoring.

− If the current value is changed with Pause Monitoring, the PLC value
changes but monitoring value of program window is not renewed.

Pausing conditions
If a specified address meets the set conditions, monitoring is paused.
Perform the following steps to set the pausing conditions.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Pausing Conditions. The Pausing Conditions window
displays.
2 Specify address on Pausing Conditions window.

282 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring

Step Action

The field descriptions for Pausing Conditions window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Select All Used to check all items with no error to allow on


the list.

Use Used to check setting status of Pause


Monitoring.

Program Selects a program name.

Reset All Used to cancel all the selected items allowed.

Variable Used to enter variable name to stop monitoring


momentarily.

Condition Used to select conditions to stop monitoring


momentarily.

Set value Used to enter condition value to stop monitoring


momentarily.

Type Displays a variable type.

Comment Used to display description declared in variable.

Find Used to find the variable to stop monitoring


momentarily on variable list of a selected
program.

OK Click to save details and to close the window.

Cancel Click to close window without saving the details.

3 Click OK to save details.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 283


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.2. LD program monitoring

ATTENTION
− A maximum of ten conditions can be set to pause monitoring.
− When you click OK, the items in error are not saved.

− Errors are displayed in pink.


− String type does not support the function of pause monitoring.
− Among the five conditions [==, >, <, >=, <=] available for pause
monitoring, you can select one.

12.2 LD program monitoring


When the SoftMaster is in monitoring mode, it displays contact points prepared in the
Ladder program (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, positive
transition pulse contact point, negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reverse-
coil, set coil, reset coil, positive transition pulse coil, negative transition pulse coil) and
function (block) I/O parameter’s current value.
Perform the following steps to start monitoring.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
2 LD program changes to monitoring mode.
3 Click Monitor > Change Current Value to change current value.

Monitor display of contact point


1. Normally open contact point: If an applicable contact point’s value is on status,
address (or variable) value displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact
point in blue.

ATTENTION
Monitor-related colors indicated in this user’s guide are the default colors of
SoftMaster. Applicable colors may be changed using Tools > Options. For
more details on the option item, refer to Basic application.

284 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

2. Normally closed contact point: If applicable contact point’s value is on status,


address value is displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact point is not
displayed.
3. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally open
contact point.
4. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally closed
contact point.

Coil monitor display


1. Coil: If applicable coil’s value is On status, address (or variable) value displays in
red, and the power flow inside the coil in blue.
2. Reverse-coil: If applicable coil’s value is On status, address (or variable) value is
displays in red, and the power flow inside the coil is not displayed.
3. Set coil: displays as similar to coil.
4. Reset coil: displays as similar to (negative) coil.
5. Positive transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil.
6. Negative transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil.

Monitor display of function (block)


Monitoring value is displayed on the IO parameter of the function (block). The data of
the function (block) IO parameter is displayed based on the monitoring display format.

ATTENTION
Data display can be customized using Tools > Options > Online. For
details, refer to Basic application.

Start/stop monitoring

Stop monitoring
• Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 285


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

ATTENTION
− When monitoring, all types of Edit is unavailable except Modification
during Run Mode.
− When monitoring starts and stops, LD diagram height changes to
display application instruction’s current value, which takes some time
according to the size of prepared program.

12.3 Variable monitoring


Monitoring is available through specific registered variables.
The field descriptions of Variable Monitoring Window are as follows:

Field Label Description

PLC Used to display PLC available for registration. A SoftMaster project is


composed of multi-PLC. Accordingly, it is displayed on the variable
monitoring window.

Program Used to select a program name with a variable to register.

Variable Name/ Used to enter the name of a variable or address.


Address

Value Used to display applicable address value when monitored. The value
can be changed through Change Current Value of monitoring.

Type Displays the type of variable.

Address/Variable Press Enter or double-click an assigned address or variable name to


Name select a variable on the list of local variables if memory is allocated.

Comment Displays the variable comment.

Error Display Error displays in red.

286 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Field Label Description

Error Type Error type:


− In case one of PLC name, address and type is not entered.
− In case of incorrect address.
− In case there is no program name or there is no program in the
PLC.
− In case the address type is not supported or PLC name
unavailable.

ATTENTION
• The areas of type, address/variable and comment column cannot be
edited by user.
• You cannot monitor four variable monitoring tabs at the same time.
• The number of addresses available to register in variable monitoring is
unlimited.
• Only the part displayed on the window is monitored.
• The larger the number of addresses, the longer the monitoring refresh
takes.
• Even if not in monitoring mode, refresh is available on variable
monitoring window.

Registering variable/comment
Monitoring items can be registered on local variable list on the variable monitoring
window.
Perform the following steps to register in variable/comment.

Step Action
1 On the monitoring window, right-click and select Register in
Variable/Comment from the context menu.
2 The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the
project or if two or more programs are included in a PLC. Select the PLC and
program to register.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 287


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Step Action
3 Click OK. The Select Variable window displays.

The field description of Select Variable window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Variable Used to enter variable names to find.

Variable type Displays variables by types.

Variable List Used to display the list of variables.

OK Used to register selected items on the varia


monitoring window.

ATTENTION
• You can select one or more items on Select Variable/Address window.
• The selected item is added in the last line of the variable monitoring
window.
• An item same as a previously registered item can be also registered.

Register all
You can register all direct variables at the same time.
Perform the following steps to register all variables.

Step Action
1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click the mouse and select Register
All from the context menu.
2 The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the
project. Select a PLC and program to register.
3 Click OK. The Register All window displays.

288 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Step Action

The field description for Register All window are as follows:

Field label Description

Start Address Used to input start address of the address to


register. (Address Ex: IX0.0.0, QB1.2.0.
MW12…)

Count Used to enter the number of registers.


4 The variable registration screen displays.

ATTENTION
• A maximum of 100 variables can be registered at a time.
• The item to register is added at the last line of the variable monitoring
window.

Register by user
The user can directly enter items to register on the variable monitoring window. You can
directly edit the PLC, Program, and Variable/Address Column.

ATTENTION
Copy, Paste, Cut, and Delete functions are provided.
• Copy: available in String format on the variable monitoring windows.
Paste is available for Excel and other String editors.
• Paste: Paste is available for variable monitoring after Copy from Excel or
other String editors.
• Delete: used to delete the selected row. Delete is also applicable for
several selected rows.
• Undo or Redo functions are not supported.

Drag and drop register from other windows


The user can select contact point, coil, variable, and so on from other windows (LD,
Variable/Comment window) to drag and drop on the variable monitoring window for
registering.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 289


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Perform the following steps to drag and drop area to register from other windows.

Step Action
1 Select the area from other windows (LD, SFC, Variable/Comment window) to
register on the variable monitoring.

Area to register onto the variable monitoring from LD window – Red Edge.

Area to register onto the variable monitor from SFC window.

Area to register onto the variable monitoring window from Variable/Comment


window.

2 Move to the variable monitoring window, press and hold the mouse’s left
button on the selected area.
• Cursor shape and input image is created onto the variable monitoring
window as shown in the following figure.

3 Release the mouse button after positioning on the row of the variable
monitoring window to insert the selected items.

290 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Step Action
4 The selected items are registered on the variable monitoring window as
shown in the following figure.

ATTENTION
• The variable registering time is directly proportional to the number of
variables to be registered.
• There is no limit on the number of variables that can be registered.
• Items inserted in the middle of rows, are registered between rows.
• Press and hold mouse’s left button and move onto variable monitoring
number tabs (Monitoring 1, Monitoring 2, Monitoring 3, and Monitoring 4)
to register on the applicable variable monitoring tabs.

View detailed/briefly
This function enables to view as many variables as possible on the variable monitoring
window.
Perform the following steps to view detailed/briefly.

Step Action
1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Briefly. The
following window displays.

Only the columns of variable/address and value displays.


2 Select Detailed to display the following window containing many rows.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 291


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

ATTENTION
• Selecting Briefly hides the PLC, Program, Type, Address/Variable, and
Comment columns.
• Even when in Brief View mode, the hidden columns can be viewed
through View function.
• The number of rows is decided by the size of the variable monitoring
window.

• In Brief View mode, the number of rows change if the size of the Variable
Monitoring Window changes.
• Even if in Brief View mode, Register, Delete and Edit functions are all
available. However, Undo and Redo functions are not supported.
• Tool tips display PLC, Type and Address only. However, the variable if
declared also displays.

View options
The user can select specific columns.
Perform the following steps to view a selected function.

Step Action
1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select View Option >
Column Name (PLC, Program, Variable/Address, Value,
Address/Variable, Comment) from the context menu.

2 To hide the selected column, right-click and select the same menu again.

292 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

ATTENTION
• By default, all view option columns are displayed.

• This function is also available in Detailed View mode.


• The value column does not support Hide function.
• If converted to Detailed or Brief View mode, hidden columns are
displayed by default.
• String in the hidden columns cannot be copied and pasted in other
editors.

Display
The display of the monitoring value of the address registered on the variable monitoring
can be changed.
Perform the following steps to change the display type of an address.

Step Action
1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Unsigned Decimal,
Signed Decimal, Hexadecimal, and String.
2 The display type of the selected address changes.

ATTENTION
• BOOL type if viewed in unsigned decimal is displayed as “On/Off”.
• Hexadecimal is displayed with small letter prefix ‘16#’ as shown in
“16#h10AC”.
• String is displayed in “”, for example, “adcd”.
• Can set different type than defined in the monitoring option for LD.

• Display menus are active or inactive based on available display type.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 293


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Monitoring operations

Start monitoring
It is used to begin monitoring of the registered addresses on the variable monitoring
window.
Perform the following steps to start monitoring.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
2 Displays item with identical Start Monitoring PLC name and the item with no
error execute Monitoring.

Variable Monitoring Window In monitoring mode.

ATTENTION
• PLC’s address value is not displayed, if not monitored.
• Any item with error is not monitored.

• Edit, Add, and Delete are available even during monitoring.

Change current value


Current value of the address can be changed in the monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to change the current value of the address in monitoring
mode.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
2 Select Address.
3 Click Monitor > Change Current Value. Double-click the address selected

294 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring

Step Action
on the variable monitoring window or press Enter.
4 The Change Current Value window displays, enabling you to directly enter
the current value.
5 Click OK to transfer the setting value to the PLC.

Find

Find
It is used to find a string based on the classification by capital/small letter.

ATTENTION
• Find and Replace function is not available on the variable monitoring
window.
• Value is regarded as a string not as a figure when Find function is run in
the value column.

Find again
It is used to find the string found before once again. Initiate the Find command on the
program or Variable/Comment, and then initiate Find Again on the variable monitoring
to start find.

Print
It prints the current active variable monitoring tab contents.

ATTENTION
• Hidden columns are not printed.
• Print Preview function is not available.

Alignment
Alignment can be changed to ascending or descending sequence.
Perform the following steps to change the alignment.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 295


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Step Action
1 Double-click on the header of the column to align.

2 Alignment changes to ascending or descending sequence.


3 After alignment, an arrow figure indicates the sequence as ascending or
descending.

ATTENTION
• If aligned in descending sequence, a downward arrow displays. An
upward arrow indicates the ascending sequence.
• By default, it is not aligned when the project is opened.

• If aligned once more in descending sequence, it is aligned in ascending


sequence.
• Alignment for row is not available.

12.4 System monitoring


System Monitoring is used to display the PLC’s slot information, assigned I/O
information, module status, and data value.

Basic application
System Monitoring can be initiated in the following two ways:
• Click Monitor > System Monitoring.
• Click Start > Program >SoftMaster > System Monitoring.

296 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

The Module Information window displays the information of the PLC slot. After reading
the module information saved in the PLC, it displays it on the data display screen of the
module information window.
Select one of the following options view the Base.

Step Action
1 Select items on the module information window (Example: Base 0, Base 1…)
2 Select Base items (First, Previous, Next, and Last)
3 Use the direction key on the keyboard to position the module’s cursor on the
base to select.

ATTENTION
To start System Monitoring, the SoftMaster must be Online with the PLC and
the Monitoring must be ON.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 297


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Connect/disconnect
System Monitoring is initiated from SoftMaster, it can also be initiated independently.
Thus, the connection is available to PLC with Connect options. If connected with PLC,
base information is read from PLC to display on the module information window.
Perform the following steps to connect/disconnect system monitoring to PLC.

Step Action
1 Specify Connect options.
2 Confirm that the cable is installed as applicable to the connection method.
3 Click PLC > Connect to connect.
4 Click PLC > Disconnect to disconnect.

ATTENTION
• System Monitoring when initiated connects to the saved Connect
options.
• If run in SoftMaster, it connects to SoftMaster’s Connect options.
• Default of Base 0 displays on the screen.

System synchronization
It reads base information, I/O assignment method, and slot information specified in the
PLC to display on the window. When monitored, it reads I/O skip information and forced
I/O input/output information to change the current value.
Perform the following steps for system synchronization.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > System Synchronization.

ATTENTION
• Executing system synchronization updates only the module information.
• For details on I/O assignment method, refer to Basic parameter.

298 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

All I/O modules ON/OFF


It is used to check output value of all the I/O modules on the PLC.

All I/O modules ON


It turns the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as ON.
Perform the following steps to turn ON the data modules.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > All I/O modules ON.

All I/O modules OFF


It makes the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as OFF.
Perform the following steps to turn OFF all I/O modules.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > All I/O modules OFF.

Selected I/O modules ON/OFF


It is used to check the output value of the selected I/O modules on the PLC.

Selected I/O module ON


All I/Os selected are forced to ON.
Perform the following steps to turn ON a selected I/O module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Selected I/O modules ON.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 299


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Selected I/O module OFF


All I/Os selected are forced to OFF.
Perform the following steps to turn OFF a selected I/O module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Selected I/O modules OFF.

Change current value


To change the current value, the SoftMaster must be connected to the PLC and be in the
monitoring mode. Click the contact point to change the data value of the selected contact
point to ON or OFF.
Perform the following steps to change the current value of a selected contact point.

Step Action
1 Ensure that the PLC is online and the monitoring mode is enabled.
2 Position the mouse cursor on the I/O module’s contact point to change the
cursor to hand shape.
3 Click the I/O module’s contact point.

ATTENTION
• Move the mouse to the I/O contact point to display the assigned address
on the status bar (located on the bottom-right of the window).
• If I/O skip is specified, it is always displays as OFF.

Information display of power module


Information of Power Module displays base power shutdown history including date,
time, and details in which power shutdown bases are displayed.

300 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Perform the following steps to display the information of a power module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Select one of the following methods to display module information:
• Select the Power Module and select PLC > Module Info.

• Select the Power Module and right-click and select Module Info. from the
context menu.
• Select the Power Module on the window and press Enter.

• Select and double-click on the Power Module displayed on the window.

The Power Down History Information window displays.

ATTENTION
• A maximum of 100 power shutdowns displays on the window.
• No module information is available for empty slots and I/O modules.

Information display of CPU module


CPU Module Information displays the CPU version, type, operation mode, key status,
CPU status, connection status, mode conversion source, forced I/O setting status, I/O
skip, and fault mask status.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a CPU module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Select one of the following methods to display the CPU module information.
• Select the CPU Module and select PLC > Module Info.

• Select the CPU Module on the Module Information window, and right-click
and select CPU Module Info. from the context menu.
• Select the CPU Module on the window and press Enter.

• Select and double-click on the CPU Module displayed on the window.

The CPU Module Information window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 301


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Information display of communication module


Communication Module Information displays module type, operation mode, hardware
error and hardware version, O/S version and its installed date.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a communication module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Select one of the following methods to display the COM module information.
• Select Communication Module and select PLC > Module Info.

• Select Communication Module on the Module Information window, right-


click and select Connection Module Info. from the context menu.
• Select Communication Module on the window and press Enter.

• Select and double-click on Communication Module displayed on the


window.

The Communication Module Information window displays.

Viewing information of special modules


Special Module Information displays the module name, O/S version and date and module
status.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a special module.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Select one of the following methods to display special module information:
• Select the Special Module and select PLC > Module Information.

• Select a Special Module on the Module Information window and right-click


and select Special Module Info. from the context menu.
• Select a Special Module on the screen and press Enter.

• Double-click a Special Module displayed on the screen.

The Special Module Information window displays.

302 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Classification Description

Module name Provides special module’s type and its


detailed information.

O/S version Provides special module’s installed O/S


version information, which is used for
upgrading module O/S later.

O/S date Provides special module’s latest O/S


updated date information.

Module status Provides special module’s current status


(error code) information.

Start/stop monitoring
It reads PLC’s I/O data to display on the window.

Start monitoring
Perform the following steps to start monitoring.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Start Monitoring.

Stop monitoring
Perform the following steps to stop monitoring.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Stop Monitoring.

Special module monitoring


It initiates monitoring the special module (A/D module, D/A module, HS counter
module).
Perform the following steps to run special module monitoring.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 303


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module Monitor
window displays.

ATTENTION
− Positioning module does not support PLC's module monitoring.
− Positioning module’s monitoring function is installed along with its
exclusive software to monitor.

Save
It is used to save the system information and data currently displayed on the window.
Perform the following steps to save the data and system information:

Step Action
1 Click File > Save.
2 Click File > Save As to save the data in a different file name.

ATTENTION
− File extension is set as (.smi).

Open
It is used to read the system information file previously saved.
To open a file:
• Disconnect from PLC.
• Click File > Open.
− Double-click an applicable file name.
− Drag and drop the file onto the System Monitoring to open it.

304 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Navigate base
It selects a base to show its module information.
Perform the following steps to navigate to the first, previous, next, and last base.

Step Action
1 Navigate to the first base:
• On the menu, click Base > First Base.

2 Navigate to the previous base:


• On the menu, click Base > Previous Base.

3 Navigate to the next base:


• On the menu, click Base > Next Base.

4 Navigate to the last base:


• On the menu, click Base > Last Base.

Print preview
This function is used to see a print preview of system monitoring.
On the Preview window, the user can modify the area to be printed.
Perform the following steps for a preview before printing.

Step Action
1 On the menu, click PLC > Disconnect.
2 On the System Monitoring window, click File > Preview.
3 Modify the area of the image displayed.
4 Move the mouse to the edge.
5 Move the mouse while being clicked to modify the size.

ATTENTION
− The specified area of Preview is saved.
− In monitoring mode, Preview is not available.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 305


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

12.5 Address monitoring


Address Monitoring enables the monitoring of all the address areas’ data in the PLC.
It can write or read data value on the PLC’s specific address. In addition, Address
Monitoring can display the data value continuously when displayed or entered on the
window depending on the bit format and display method.

Basic application
Address Monitoring is performed by the following two ways:
• On the SoftMaster menu, click Monitor > Address Monitoring.
• On the Start menu, click Program > SoftMaster > Address Monitoring.

The address information window displays all the address areas in the PLC, based on CPU
type.
Double-click the address icon (Example: I. Q, M, R, W) or right-click on the Address
Tree window and choose Open Address from the context menu.

306 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

ATTENTION
• To start address monitoring, SoftMaster must be Online with PLC and
the monitoring must be ON.
• If monitoring mode is OFF, the address displays the previous data value.
The data value is initialized to 0.

Address areas
Address areas are necessary for effective and correct control of various types of data.
PLC provides various address areas of data to manage the data effectively.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the respective detailed address area, refer to
2MLI CPUU User’s Guide.

Data format and display items


Data is displayed on the window in the following ways:

Display Setting Description

Data Size 1 bit, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, and 64 bits

Display Format Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, Signed


decimal, Hexadecimal, Real, String

1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, and 64 bit


Data size of the address is displayed in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit
To display the data size of the address in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit:
• Click View > View Options >1 bit/8 bit/16 bit/32 bit/64 bit from the menu of the
Address Monitoring window.

ATTENTION
The address of a selected cell is displayed in the task bar.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 307


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and text
Address data can also be displayed in binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal,
hexadecimal, real, and text format by choosing the appropriate View option.

Edit data
Data value is specified to write address data on the PLC, or to write the selected area on
the PLC.

Edit cell
It is used to edit data in the cell.
Perform the following steps to edit data in the cell:

Step Action
1 Use the mouse or keyboard to select an optional cell.
2 If in monitoring mode, data can be directly entered in the selected cell. If
monitoring is off, double-click the bottom right of the cell to open a dialog box
to enter the data.

Cut, copy, paste, delete data


You can Cut, Copy, Paste, and delete data from the cell. This works like the standard
windows functions.

Fill
It is used to fill the selected data.
Perform the following steps to fill a selected area.

Step Action
1 Use the mouse to select the cell area to fill automatically.
2 Position the mouse at the end of the cell to make the mouse cursor shape as
“+”.
3 Move the mouse with its left button pressed up/down and right/left.
4 Release the left button of the mouse.

308 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Save address
Use one of the following three methods to save the address.

Save all address areas


To save all address areas:

Step Action
1 Click File > Save.
2 Click File > Save As to save the data with a different file name.
• File extension is set as (.mem).

Save respective address area


To save a respective address area:

Step Action
1 Click File > Export Address to File.

File extension is set as (address+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm,…)

Save respective address area with all windows closed


To save a respective address area in case if all windows are closed.

Step Action
1 Click File > Export Address to File.
2 Select the address to save from the list.
• File extension is set as (i+device+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm,…)

Open address
Use one of the following three methods available to open an address.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 309


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Open all address areas


To open all address areas:
• Select File > Open.

Import address from file


To import an address from file:
• Click File > Import Address from File.

Open respective address area with all windows closed


To open a respective address area in case of all windows closed:
• Click File > Import Address from File. Select the address to open from the list.

ATTENTION
When in monitoring mode, Open and Import Address from File are inactive.

Data value setting


Data value of the address is specified according to its display type and the number of bits.
In addition, you can select setting area of the data value.
Perform the following steps to set the data value:
• Stop monitoring.
• Select Edit > Fill Data Area. The Fill Data Area window displays.
The field descriptions for Fill Data Area window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Title bar Used to display the address to set its data value.

Data value Used to enter and display the data compatible with the
number of bits and the display format.

Bit value Used to decide the size of data.

310 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Field Label Description

Setup area Used to decide the range of the data value applied to in
the address.

Display Used to decide the input format of data and change


format of the data value accordingly if any data value is
available.

ATTENTION
Address name is displayed on the title to display Setting Data Value.

Clear data
It is used to delete all data values of the address.
Perform the following steps to delete all the data values of an address.

Step Action
1 Click Edit > Clear Data.
2 You are prompted to confirm the deletion of all address areas.

Write to PLC
It is used to transfer the address data saved in online computer to PLC.
Perform the following steps to write a saved address data to PLC.

Step Action
1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is inactive.
2 Click PLC > Write to PLC. The Write to PLC window displays.
3 Select the address to write on Write of PLC window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 311


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Step Action

The field descriptions for Write to PLC window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Area Used to display the list of the addresses to


write on PLC.

Select All Used to select all the addresses in the


address area.

Unselect All Used to cancel all the addresses selected


in the address area.

4 Click OK to write the selected address on the PLC.

ATTENTION
F address’s exclusive Read areas cannot be written on PLC. Exclusive read
areas are based on the type of CPU.

Read from PLC


It is used to read the address data saved in PLC to online computer.
Perform the following steps to read a saved address data from PLC.

Step Action
1 Ensure PLC is connected and is in the monitoring mode.
2 Click PLC > Read from PLC. The Read from PLC window displays.
3 Select the address to read from Read from PLC window.

The field descriptions for Read from PLC window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Area Used to display the list of the


addresses to read from PLC.

Select All Used to select all the addresses in


the address area.

Unselect All Used to cancel all the addresses


selected in the address area.

312 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Step Action
4 Click OK to read the selected address from the PLC.

Write selected area on PLC


It is used to write the address data in the selected area on PLC connected.
Perform the following steps to write the address data of a selected area to PLC.

Step Action
1 Select the area to write on PLC.
2 Click PLC > Write Selected Area to PLC.
3 A confirmation message displays. You are prompted to confirm if you want to
write the selected area on the PLC.
4 Click Yes to write the selected area on PLC.

Start/stop monitoring
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status, or it
stops reading the data.

Start monitoring
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status.
Perform the following steps to start monitoring.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Start Monitoring.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 313


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Stop monitoring
It stops reading the address data from PLC in the on-line status.
Perform the following steps to stop monitoring.

Step Action
1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.
2 Click PLC > Stop Monitoring.

ATTENTION
• If in monitoring mode, the data cannot be edited.
• If in monitoring mode, Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Write Selected
Area to PLC are not available.

Change current value


It is used to change the data value of the cell in monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to change the data value of a cell in monitoring mode.

Step Action
1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is active.
2 Click PLC > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value window
displays.

The field descriptions for Change Current Value window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Used to display the start address to change the


current value.

Bit number Used to display the number of bits to change the


current value.
− Usually it is identical to 1, 8, 16, 32 or 64
bits as displayed on the window.
− String format is displayed in 32∗8 bits.

Display Used to display the data display format to change


the current value.

314 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Step Action

Set Value Used to display the data value to change the current
value.

ATTENTION
If the current value is changed in string display format, the data value of 32-
byte area is always changed from the start address.

PLC type settings


It is used to display the PLC type currently set or to set address data based on the PLC
type.
To view or change the PLC type settings:
• Select File > PLC Type Settings. The PLC Type Setting window displays.
The field descriptions for PLC Type Setting window are as follows:

Field Label Description

PLC Type Used to display or change the PLC type


currently set.

CPU Type Displays the currently set CPU type or


changes the CPU type.

ATTENTION
While connected to the PLC, the current PLC type displays but is not
changeable.

Screen zoom-in/zoom-out
It is used to zoom in or out the size of the screen displayed.
• To zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In.
• To zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out.

Automatic width/height adjustment


This function is used to adjust the size of the data values to display on the window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 315


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring

Width AutoFit adjusts the size to the string length of the cell. Automatic Height
Adjustment adjusts the row height to the string height of the cell.
• To auto-fit width adjustment, click View > Width Auto-Fit.
• To auto-fit height adjustment, click View > Height Auto-Fit.

View properties
It is used to change the font and font size of the data value displayed on the window. In
addition, the color of the data value can be changed in the monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to view the properties of data value.

Step Action
1 Click View > View Properties. The View Setting window displays.
2 Select Font… to change font.
3 Select Color… to change color.

The field descriptions for View Setting window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Font Type, Font size Shows currently displayed font name and font
size.

Font Invokes a dialog box to change font name


and font size displayed on the window.

Data value color Displays color of data value currently


specified in monitoring mode.

Color Invokes a dialog box to change color of data


value in monitoring mode.

4 Click OK to apply the newly specified value.

Page setting
It is used to specify the address page printed. Page margins, title, and grid lines can be
shown or hidden as necessary. In addition, the sequence of pages to print can be specified
with priority of row or column.
Perform the following steps to view or change the page settings.

316 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.6. Special module monitoring

Step Action
1 Select File > Page Setup. The Page Setup window displays.
2 Specify margins.
3 Show or hide title and grid lines as necessary.
4 Specify the sequence of pages to print with priority of row or column.
5 Specify the print type of the center of page, horizontal or vertical.

12.6 Special module monitoring


Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module List
window displays. It displays the list of special module currently installed on
the PLC system.
2 Select a module on the list and click Monitor. The Special Module
Monitoring window displays.

The field descriptions for Special Module Monitoring window are as follows:

Field Label Description

FLAG Monitor (applicable Flag monitoring function is used to run


only to HS counter instructions for HS counter module. The
module) user can check the instruction and enter
signal status along with HS counter
monitoring/test window as well as Flag
monitoring window displays at the same
time.

Parameter Setting Screen Parameter setting window is divided into


parameter changing area (setting value) and
confirming area (current value), the changed
parameter is successfully transferred to the
module during monitoring.

Start Monitoring Click Start Monitoring to start monitoring.


Click Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring.

Test After changing the parameter in


Monitoring/Test window, click Test Start to
begin testing the operation of applicable
special module, which directly transfers the

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 317


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Step Action
parameter information to the module so to
display its result on the monitoring window
for the user to confirm.

Contact Point Input Signal The user can confirm HS counter status of
Status Screen input contact point signal (ON/OFF) through
the Flag monitoring window.

Instruction Screen The user can initiate the instruction for HS


counter operation and additional functions at
the Flag monitoring window. If the instruction
is correctly run, the status of the applicable
instruction displays as ON/OFF.

3 Through the Monitoring/Test window, the user can directly change the
parameter value saved in the special module while checking the test
operation and its status of the applicable module.

ATTENTION
Select the HS counter module on the special module window to write HS
counter Flag monitoring and instruction functions.

12.7 Trend monitoring


Trend monitoring is used to read the data periodically from the PLC connected to display
in a graphical format. The trend monitoring window is composed of bit graph and trend
graph. In the bit graph, bit address’s On/Off status displays in stair-shaped graph. In trend
graph, the variation trend of the data displays with the address value converted from
word to data format specified.

Configuring trend monitoring


To configure trend monitoring,

Step Action
1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. Select Graph > Trend Settings. The
Trend Setup window displays.

318 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Step Action
2 The field descriptions for Trend Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Frequency Used to specify the cycle to read data from


PLC. The shorter the cycle, the more correct
the data is, which may have an influence on
PLC scan and PC performance.

Address Setting Used to assign the address to monitor. The


address displays in bit or in real as specified.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to closes the window.

ATTENTION
• The maximum samples to display cannot be greater than the maximum
sample to keep.

• The maximum time to display cannot be greater than the maximum time
to keep.
• The relationship between the maximum samples to keep and the
maximum sample to display is as shown in the following figure. In the
following figure, graph is of the current graph area displayed on the
screen, which can be scrolled horizontally as many as the maximum
samples displayed.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 319


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

• The maximum samples to keep means the maximum number of samples


available to save on the file.

Start trend monitoring


Perform the following steps to start trend monitoring.

Step Action
1 Connect to the PLC.
2 Click Monitor > Trend Monitoring.

320 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Step Action

The Legend description are as follows:

Legend Description

A Bit graph: displays the data of bit address.

B Bit graph index: displays the bit graph and graph colors.

C Bit graph current value: displays the current value of the


bit address.

D Trend graph: displays the data of word address.

E Trend graph index: displays the word address and graph


colors.

F Trend graph current value: displays the current value of


word address.

ATTENTION
The data displayed in the trend monitor may be different with the actual data.
In order to monitor accurate timing, use the data trace function.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For information on the data trace function, refer to Data traces.

Setting bit address


It is used to enter the bit address to monitor.
Perform the following steps to set a bit address.

Step Action
1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
2 Select Graph > Trend Settings.
3 Select the bit graph tab on the Trend Setup window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 321


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Step Action
4 Enter the address of bit type or double-click the variable column to select the
declared address on the Variable/Comment window.

ATTENTION
A maximum of eight bit addresses can be registered.

Setting trend graph


It is used to set the trend address to monitor.
Perform the following steps to set a trend address.

Step Action
1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
2 Select Graph > Trend Settings.
3 Select the trend graph tab on the Setting Monitoring window.
4 Enter the address of word type or double-click the variable column to select
the declared address on the Variable/Comment window.
5 Click the type column to select the data type.

ATTENTION
A maximum of four trend addresses can be registered. Supported data types
are as follows:

Type Size Type Size

BIT 1 bit REAL 4 bytes

BYTE 1 byte LREAL 8 bytes

WORD 2 bytes INT 2 bytes

DWORD 4 bytes DINT 4 bytes

LWORD 8 bytes LINT 8 bytes

322 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Setting graph
Perform the following steps to view or change graph settings.

Step Action
1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
2 Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setup window displays.

The field descriptions for Graph Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Show grid Used to decide to show XY grid or not on the


window.

Show X-axis data Used to decide to show X-axis data or not.

X-axis data option Used to specify the display method of X-axis


data.

Minimum Used to set the maximum/minimum range of


value/Maximum value the graph.

Bit graph legend Used to specify the position of bit graph index.
No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left
Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the
Bit Index Position.

Trend graph legend Used to specify the position of trend graph


index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left
Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the
Trend Index Position.

Color Used to specify address color of each graph.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
• The maximum/minimum value is applied only to Y-axis of the trend
graph, and not applied if View Current Y-axis is automatically adjusted.

• The minimum value input cannot be greater than the maximum value.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 323


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

• The actual data’s maximum/minimum value range and specified graph’s


maximum/minimum value range are as shown below. Only the range in
gray is displayed in the graph.

• If you do not select View in Setting Color, its applicable address does not
display in the graph.

Graph color settings


Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph.

Step Action
1 Select the address to change its graph color.

2 Click the color column to display the Color dialog box. On the dialog box,
select a color and click OK.

324 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

View graph option settings


Perform the following steps to view graph option settings.

Step Action
1 Select the address to change its Graph Option.

2 Select or cancel the Check Box of View Column.

Setting graph window


It is used to decide to change View Graph Option and display the data value as necessary.
Perform the following steps to view or change graph window settings:

Step Action
1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
2 Select Graph > Graph window Settings. The Graph Window Setup
window displays.

The field descriptions for Graph Window Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

View all Displays all the bit and trend graphs.

View bit graph Displays only the bit graph.

View graph value Displays only the bit graph value.

View trend graph value Displays the trend graph value.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 325


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Graph function

View cursor
It is used to display the data value where the mouse is positioned on.
Perform the following steps to view the data value the mouse is positioned on.

Step Action
1 Select Graph > Show Cursor.
2 Click to select the graph. Whenever the mouse moves, the data value where
the cursor is positioned displays.

ATTENTION
Show cursor function is only active in the state of Stop Monitoring/Pause
Monitoring.

Scroll synchronization
It is used to synchronize the bit graph with the trend graph in time axis. It is useful in
monitoring the bit graph and the trend graph data simultaneously.
For scroll synchronization:
Select Graph > Synchronize Scrolling.

• Move the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the bit graph and the trend graph at the
same time based on the specified scroll synchronization.

326 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Adjust X-axis magnification


It is used to adjust X-axis magnification.
To adjust X-axis magnification:
• Select Graph > Zoom In X axis, Zoom Out X axis, Reset X-axis. Based on the
selected item, X-axis’s time interval is increased, decreased or back to default value.

Adjust Y-axis magnification


It is used to adjust Y-axis magnification.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 327


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

To adjust Y-axis magnification:


• Select Graph > Zoom In Y axis, Zoom Out Y axis, Reset Y axis. Based on the
selected item, Y-axis’s height is increased, decreased or back to default value.

Adjust X-axis automatically


It is used to adjust X-axis automatically. If the automatic adjustment is set, the horizontal
scroll bar disappears and all the data can be seen at a glance.
To adjust X-axis automatically:
• Select Graph > Auto-Fit X axis.

Auto-fit Y-axis
It is used to decide to adjust Y-axis automatically. The automatic adjustment of Y-axis is
applicable only to the trend graph.
To adjust Y-axis automatically:
• Select Graph > Auto-Fit Y-axis.

ATTENTION
If the function of Auto-fit Y-axis is not selected, the display is based on the
maximum/minimum value specified in Graph Settings.

328 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring

Save as bitmap
It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as bit map.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a bitmap.

Step Action
1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Bitmap.
2 Input a file name to save as and then click OK.

Save as text
It is used to save the graph data as a text file. Samples as many as the maximum samples
specified in setting the maximum graph saved.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a text.

Step Action
1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Text.
2 Input a file name to save as and then click OK.

ATTENTION
The string file is saved in CSV format of Excel.

Copy to clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window onto the window
clipboard.
Perform the following steps to copy the graph to clipboard.
• Select Graph > Copy to Clipboard.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 329


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

12.8 Data traces


Trace Data is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC to
collect the data complying with the specified condition from PLC. In the SoftMaster,
applicable data read from the PLC displays as a graph. While being similar to the trend
monitoring, it can collect more correct data as read from PLC.
Trace Data operates as follows.
Steps Details

Ready Confirm the connection with PLC and the Run status of PLC.

Decide to allow trace or not and specify trigger condition, sample


Trace Setting
properties, and trace address. For more information, refer to Trace
setting.

Writing to PLC Write trace setting items on PLC. For more information, refer to Write
trace setting.

Start trace with specified trigger conditions automatically or with


Trace starts
manual trace selected. For details on trigger setting, refer to Trace
setting. For details on manual trace, refer to Write trace setting.

Read Data Read trace data from PLC. For more details, see section on Read
Trace in Write trace setting.

Creating a graph For more details, refer to Trace setting.

330 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Perform the following steps to view data trace.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays.

2 The field descriptions for Data Traces window are as follows:

Field Label Description

a. Menu Displays the data trace menu.

b. Tool Box Displays the tool box of the data trace.

c. Bit graph Displays the bit address and graph color.


Index

d. Bit graph Displays the data of bit address.

e. Word graph Displays the word address and graph color.


Index

f. Word graph Displays the data of word address.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 331


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Step Action

g. Status bar Displays the status of data trace.

h. Progress bar Displays the progress status if data is read from PLC.

PLC status Displays off-line status and the operation status of


PLC.

j. Trace status Displays the trace status of PLC.

Connecting to PLC
To connect to the PLC:
• Click Online > Connect.

ATTENTION
For more information, refer to Connection options for the PLC.

Trace setting
It is used to specify trace conditions and trace address.
Perform the following steps to view or change data trace settings.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor> Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays.
2 On the Data Traces window, select Trace > Trace Settings from the menu.

The Data trace setting window displays.

The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Trend Setup window are as
follows:

Field Label Description

Trace Decides to allow the trace. You can enable or


disable trace.

Trigger settings Specifies the condition for trace start. You can
select a bit trigger condition or word condition.

Bit condition Decides to use bit trigger condition. You can


enable/disable bit trigger condition. For bit
trigger setting, refer to Step 3: Setting Bit

332 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Step Action
Trigger.

Address Specifies the address to monitor the bit trigger


condition.

Word condition Decides to use word trigger condition. You can


enable/disable word condition. As for word
trigger setting, refer to Step 6: Setting Word
Trigger.

Address Specifies the address to monitor the word


trigger condition.

Sampling frequency Specifies the cycle to collect data.

Total sample Specifies the number of samples in total to


collect. The number of samples in total is
decided based on the input sample address.

Samples after trigger Specifies the number of samples to collect after


triggered.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Setting bit trigger


3 To set the bit trigger, select the bit condition check box.
4 Enter the address to use as a bit condition. Bit address format is only
available.
5 Specify trigger condition, where rising or falling is available. Rising means
that the address value changes from 0 to 1, and falling means that the
address value changes from 1 to 0.

Setting Word trigger


6 To set the Word Trigger, select the word condition check box.

It uses the variation of the word address value as a trigger condition.


7 Enter the address to use as a word condition. Word address format is only
available.
8 Enter the constant value to compare with word address value.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 333


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Step Action
9 Select a condition to use to compare with the constant value input. Available
conditions are as follows:

< (less than), <= (less than or equal to), == (equal to), >= (greater than or
equal to), > (greater than),

Bit address settings


10 Select the Bit address settings tab on the Data Trace Settings window.

It is used to select the bit address to collect data. The selected address
displays in a bit graph.

The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Bit address settings window
are as follows:

Field Label Description

Number of addresses Displays the number of bit addresses specified.

Size of data Displays the size of the data specified. More than
1 bit address displays in 2 bytes.

Address list Displays the list of the bit addresses specified.

Enter the address of bit type. Right-click and


select Add Line to add a line. Right-click and
select Delete Line to delete the address.

ATTENTION
A maximum of 16 bit type addresses can be entered.

Word address settings


11 Select the word address setting tab on the Data Trace Settings window.

It is used to select the word address to collect data. The selected address
displays in a word graph.

The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Word address settings
window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Number of Address Displays the number of word address specified.

Size of data Displays the size of the data specified. The size is

334 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Step Action
decided based on the specified data type.

Address list Displays the list of the word addresses specified.

Address Enter the address of word type.

Data type Select the data type of address.

ATTENTION
A maximum of eight addresses of word type can be entered.
Supported data types are as follows:

Type Size Type Size

SINT 1 byte REAL 4 bytes

INT 2 bytes LREAL 8 bytes

DINT 4 bytes INT 2 bytes

LINT 8 bytes DINT 4 bytes

USINT 1 byte LINT 8 bytes

ATTENTION
Use the number of samples in total and the number of samples after trigger to
apply various collection methods.
• Number of samples in total = number of samples after trigger: a method
to collect data after trigger, which is used when the data before trigger is
not necessary.
• Number of samples in total > number of samples after triggered (≠0): a
method to collect data even before trigger, which is used when the data
before and after trigger is necessary.
• Number of samples after triggered = 0: a method not to collect data after
trigger, which is used when the data after trigger is not necessary.

Graph settings
To view or change graph address settings:
• Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setting window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 335


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

a) Show grid: used to decide whether to show XY grid or not on the window.
b) Show trigger: used to decide whether to display the trigger position on the
graph, and to specify the color.
c) Bit graph legend: used to specify the position of bit graph index. The options
are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right
Bottom for the Bit Index Position.
d) Word graph legend: used to specify the position of word graph index. The
options are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and
Right Bottom for the Word Index Position.
e) Color setup: used to specify address color of each graph.
f) OK: saves the changes and closes the window.
g) Cancel: closes the window.

336 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Graph color setting


Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph:

Step Action
1 Select the address to change its graph color.

2 Click the color column to display color dialog box. On the dialog box, select a
color and click OK.

Trace
It is used to read the data traced from the PLC or the data specified.

Write trace setting


It applies the trace setting to the PLC.
To view write trace settings:
• Click Trace > Write Trace Settings.

Read trace settings


It is used to read trace settings from the PLC.
To view read trace settings:
• Click Trace > Read Trace Settings.

Read data traces


It reads trace data from PLC.
To read data traces:
• Click Trace > Read Trace.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 337


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Start manual trace


It is used to start to trace data under the trace condition currently specified.
To start tracing the data manually:
• Click Trace > Start Manual Trace. If data is currently traced, the applicable menu
is inactive.

Animation
Using the trace data read from the PLC, it displays the data chronological sequence.

Animation settings
To view animation settings:

Step Action
1 On the Data Traces window menu, select Animation > Animation Setting.
The Animation window displays.

The field descriptions for Animation window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Frequency Used to specify the cycle to update the data


sample on the window. Available data update
cycles are 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, and
2000ms value.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Start
It is used to start Animation. Animation is active only with trace data is available.
• Click Animation > Start Animation.

Pause
It is used to stop Animation in progress momentarily.
• Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.

338 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Resume
It is used to continue Animation which was momentarily stopped.
• Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.

Stop
It is used to stop Animation.
• Click Animation > Stop Animation.

Graph function

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the basic graph functions, refer to Graph
function.

Move trigger
It moves the trigger to its generated point of time.
To move the trigger:
• Click Graph > Go to Trigger Position.

File function
It is used to save or read trace setting from the file.

Open
Perform the following steps to open a file.

Step Action
1 Click File > Open. The File dialog box displays.
2 Select a file name to open and click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 339


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Save
Perform the following steps to save a file.

Step Action
1 Click File > Save. The File Save dialog box displays.
2 Enter the file name to save with and click OK.

Save as
Perform the following steps to save a file with a specific file name.

Step Action
1 Click File > Save As. The File Save dialog box displays.
2 Enter a different file name to save and click OK.

Save as bit map


It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as a bit map.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a bit map.

Step Action
1 Click File > Send > Save as Bitmap.
2 Enter the name of a file to save and click OK.

Save text
It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the maximum
samples specified in setting as maximum graph are saved.
Perform the following steps to save trace data as text.

Step Action
1 Click File > Send > Save Trace data as Text.
2 Enter a file name to save and click OK.

340 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces

Copy clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window clipboard.
To copy the data onto the windows clipboard:
• Click File > Send > Copy to Clipboard.

View function
This function is used to display or hide the tool bar and the status display line on the
window.

View tool bar


To view toolbar:
• Click View > Tool Name.

View status display line


To view status display line:
• Click View > Status Bar.

Data
It displays the trace data value. View Data is active only with trace data available.
To view Trace Data:
• Click View > Trace Data. The Trace Data window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 341


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

a) Trace info: displays the trace sampling cycle.


b) View Settings: displays the trace details.
c) Data Grid: displays the current value specified in the sequence of the
samples. The sample data displays in negative before trigger, and in positive
after trigger.
d) Minimum, Maximum, Average: displays the Minimum, Maximum, and
Average value per address.

e) Close: closes the window.

342 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

12.9 Custom events


Overview of custom events
The custom events refer to a series of events whose conditions are the addresses specified
by the user. User-defined events are registered in the PLC, which monitors the registered
events and records the event history if generated. The event history can be used to
operate and debug the system.

Perform the following steps to set custom events.

Step Action
1 Create a program as follows:

2 Write the program to the PLC and click Monitor > Custom Event. The
Custom Event window displays.
3 Click Menu>Add event. The Event Setting window displays and setup basic
setting in the window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 343


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action
4 Click Associated Address Setup tab and setup the bit address %MX100
and word address %MW0 to store the data when the event is met.
5 Click OK to close the window.

Select Enable for Custom Event Capture and click OK. A message displays
since the event setup has been changed. Click Yes.

6 Change the PLC mode to RUN.


7 Click Online > Monitor > Custom Event to check event history. The
Custom Event window displays and select Event History tab.
8 In the Event History tab, an Event History window displays when you select
an event item, click Properties to view the list of associated address and the
details of event.

Event setting

Example
An event is defined as the data of %MW0 whose data increase by 1 if every scan is
greater than 100 and less than 110, and if the event is met, PLC stores the data of
%MW0.
Perform the following steps for event setting.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor > Custom Events. The Custom Events window displays.
2 Click Event settings tab.

The field descriptions for Custom Events window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Custom Event capture Used to determine whether to allow the user


event or not. If the event is disabled, PLC
does not collect the Custom Events.

344 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action

Events History Displays the list of the Custom Events


currently specified.

Menu Displays the event setting menu.

Apply PLC Applies the changes to CPU without closing


the window.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
For additional information on each item of the events list, refer to Adding
custom event item.

Adding custom event item


Perform the following steps to add a custom event item:

Step Action
1 On the Custom Event window, select Add Event from Menu. The Event
Setting window displays.
2 Select the Basic setting tab.

The field descriptions for Event Setting > Basic Setting window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address Used to enter the address to monitor the events. The


event address is of the value 0 or 1 in bit format only.

Variable Names Displays Variable/Comment dialog box. The address


can be selected from Variable/Comment declared in
the Variable/Comment dialog box.

Event condition Used to specify the condition to make the user event
occur. If you select rising condition, the user event
occurs when the event address value changes from
0 to 1. And if you select falling condition, the user
event occurs when the event address value changes
from 1 to 0. If you select transition condition, the user

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 345


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action
event occurs whenever the event address value
changes.

Type Used to specify the user event type. You can select
an applicable type among Information, Alarm, and
Warning.

Message Used to enter an event message. The maximum


length of the message is 80 characters in English.
The event message input is displays with Event
History menu.

OK Click to save the changes and to closes the window.

Cancel Click to close the window.


3 Enter event address information, event conditions, event type, and event
message or click Variable/Comment to select the address from the declared
Variable/Comment.
4 Select the Associated address’s setting tab to specify the Associated
address. Associated address is used to capture the values of related address
including any values.

The field descriptions for Event Setting > Associated address’s setting
window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Available Displays the sum of the size of the


each associated address type
input, which is available up to 16
bytes.

Associated addresses Setup Used to enter the associated


addresses. You can enter up to
eight associated addresses.

5 Click OK to save the entered items, or click Cancel to cancel it.

ATTENTION
Event type is specified by user based on the importance of the event and is
used as a classifying method of events for Event View.

346 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on address type and display format, refer to
Registering variable/comment. Also refer to Event history.

ATTENTION
− If associated addresses are specified, the value of the associated
addresses is also recorded when applicable events happen.
− Up to eight associated addresses can be specified in up to 16 bytes
based on the data type of the address input. Supported data type and
its respective byte size are as follows:

Type Size Type Size

BIT 1 Byte REAL 4 Bytes

USINT 1 Byte LREAL 8 Bytes

UINT 2 Bytes INT 2 Bytes

UDINT 4 Bytes DINT 4 Bytes

ULINT 8 Bytes LINT 8 Bytes

Up to 10 custom events are available for registration.

Editing events
It is used to edit the user event items.
Perform the following steps to edit a user event.

Step Action
1 Select the event to edit.

2 Right-click and select Edit Event from the context menu. The Event Setting
window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 347


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action
3 Update the changes and click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to
cancel it.

Deleting event
It deletes the user event input.
Perform the following steps to delete an event.

Step Action
1 Select the event to delete.
2 Right-click and select delete from the context menu.
3 Select Delete All from the context menu to delete all events.

Custom event capture


It is used to Enable or Disable event capture.
Corresponding to Custom Event Capture, click Enable to capture the event, or click
Disable to disable the event capture.

Event capture setting


You can enable/disable each event from being displayed.
Perform the following steps to enable/display an event.

Step Action
1 Select the event to be enabled.

2 Select the checkbox corresponding to the event in the Enable column to


enable it. Clear the checkbox to disable it.

348 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Custom event copy/paste


Perform the following steps to copy/paste custom events.

Step Action
1 Select the event to copy.

Right-click and select Copy from the context menu.


2 Move to the position to paste and right-click and select Paste from the
context menu.
3 The Event is pasted in the selected row.

Custom event cut/paste


Perform the following steps to cut/paste custom events.
Step Action
1 Select the event to cut.
2 Right-click and select Cut from the context menu.
3 Move to the position to paste.
4 Right-click and select Paste from the context menu.

Save event
Since the user-defined event is saved in PLC, it is additionally saved to manage as files.
Perform the following steps to save all the events.
R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 349
January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action
1 Select the event.
2 Right-click and Save Event from the context menu.
3 Enter a file name to save on the File Save dialog box and click OK.

Open event
It read user-defined event setting from the file.
Perform the following steps to open an event.

Step Action
1 On the Custom Event window, right-click and select Open Event from the
context menu.
2 Select a file to read and then click OK.

ATTENTION
− The event if opened is added to the list of current events.
− A maximum of 10 custom events are added to the list.

Event history
Read the user event history saved in the PLC to display the details.
Perform the following steps to view event history.

Step Action
1 Click Monitor>Custom Event. The Custom Event window displays.
2 Select the Event History tab.

The field descriptions for Custom Event > Event History window are as
follows:

Field Label Description

Event History List Displays the event history available on the PLC.

350 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action

Menu Displays the event history related menu.

Apply PLC Inactive on the event history page.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

ATTENTION
− For additional information on event history item, refer to Detailed
event history view.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event
history view.

Detailed event history view


It displays the details of the event.
Perform the following steps to view the details of an event.

Step Action
1 On the Custom Event window, select the item to display its Event History.

2 Select Information. The Event History window displays.

The field descriptions for Event History window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Date Displays the date when an event occurs in Year-


Month-Date format.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 351


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Step Action

Time Displays the time when an event occurs in Hour:


Minute: Second: MS.

Condition Displays event details specified in event setting


items.

Related address Displays the associated address list and the value
list when the event occurred. Right-click on View in
hexadecimal or View as specified to change the
display format of the address value.

Back Displays the previous event history.

Next Displays the next event history.

Copy Copies the current event history.

Close Closes the window.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event
history view.

Refresh
It updates the event history with recent details in PLC.
To refresh the event history, on the Custom Event window, click Menu>Refresh.

Event filtering
The history displays based on the event type selected.
Select View All.

352 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

Select View Information.

Select View Warning

Select View Alarm

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 353


January 2011 Honeywell
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events

354 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.1 Start/stop debugging
Start debugging
Perform the following steps to start debugging.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC,
2 Click Online > Write to download the program to the PLC.
3 Click Online > Change Mode > Debug or
Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.

ATTENTION
• Debug is unavailable if PLC operation is in Run mode.

• This function is available only with PLC in online mode.


• Debug function is available only when the SoftMaster program and PLC
program are identical. If they are not identical, download the applicable
program.
• Monitoring function is also available in Debug mode.
• If an error occurs on the PLC, Debug instruction does not work normally.
Clear the error to run the Debug instruction.

Stop debugging
Perform the following steps to stop debugging.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Change Mode > Stop or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.
2 PLC ends Debug and changes to the STOP mode.

ATTENTION
Even if Debug stops, Monitoring continues.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 355


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

13.2 LD program debugging


It is used to specify functions to debug the prepared LD program.

Set remove breakpoints


It is used to set or remove the Breakpoint per step.

Set breakpoint
Perform the following steps to set Breakpoints.

Step Action
1 Move the mouse cursor to the step to specify.
2 Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

ATTENTION
• The break cannot be set on the area specified by a Block Mask
instruction.
• Application instruction sets the breakpoint on the instruction string area.

356 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

Remove breakpoint
Perform eth following steps to remove Breakpoints.

Step Action
1 Move the Breakpoint to the step to remove.
2 Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

Go
It starts program debugging using the specified Breakpoint. With the Go function, the
program can be run up to the Breakpoint specified.
Perform the following steps to run the program up to the specified Breakpoint.

Step Action
1 Click Debug > Go. The program runs until the breakpoint condition is reached.
2 To go to the next Breakpoint, click Debug > Go.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 357


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

Step Action

Go to cursor
It is used to make the program run up to the cursor position.
Perform the following steps to run the program until the cursor position.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the position to run.
2 Click Debug > Go to the Cursor.

358 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

Step into, step out and step over functions


If the Breakpoint is engaged during debugging, its progress is made step by step. When
debugging a program, Step Into, Step Out functions are provided.

Step into
It runs the program to the next step. If the current step is an application instruction CALL
with the running condition satisfied, it enters the subroutine block.
• On the menu, click Debug > Step Into.

ATTENTION
If not with CALL instruction or if the CALL running condition is not satisfied,
the program runs to the next step.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 359


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

Step out
It is used to step out of the subroutine block once entered with Step into function
executed.
• On the menu, click Debug > Step Out.

360 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging

ATTENTION
− If the currently debugged step is not inside the subroutine block, the
program is run to the next step.

Step over
It is used to run the program to the next step. Unlike Step Into, even if the current step is
an application instruction CALL, it does not enter the subroutine block but run the
program to the next step.
• On the menu, click Debug > Step Over.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 361


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.3. List of break points

13.3 List of break points


The list shows all the Break Points being used in the program, where the user can decide
to use or delete the Break Point.
• On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoints List.

• Use: If the breakpoint is deselected, it is not deleted from the list.

• Program: Displays the name of the program where the breakpoint is used.

• Step: Displays the step number where the breakpoint is caught.

• Count: The number of time run, as the specified steps where the breakpoint is
caught, PLC is braked. (Example: if the breakpoint is set inside, FOR 20 ~
NEXT with the number of times 10, FOR 20 ~NEXT is run 10 times and then is
braked.)

• OK: Saves the changes and closes the window.

• Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes.

• Select All: Checks all the listed items to allow.

• Reset: Cancels all the checked items previously allowed.

• Go to: Used to move to the position where the selected breakpoint is used.

• Remove: Deletes the selected breakpoints from the list.

• Remove All: Deletes all the breakpoints from the list.


362 SoftMaster User's Guide R200
Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.4. Variable break

ATTENTION
A maximum of 62 Breakpoints can be registered in the PLC.

13.4 Variable break


Applicable debugging is available based on the data value and the application of the
variable.

Setting variable break


• On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition
window displays. Select Variable Break point tab.

a) Use the address as a variable break point: If you do not select the check
box, the variable break even if saved, is not be used.
b) Variable: Shows the variable name used for variable break.
c) Program: Shows the program name of the variable used for variable break.
d) Address: Displays the address name if the variable’s memory is allocated in
the local variable.
e) Comment: Displays the comment if the variable’s comment is declared in the
local variable.
f) Value Condition: If you do not select the check box, the value even if saved,
does not make the value break engaged.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 363


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break

g) Value: If the specified address value is reached, the break is engaged. The
maximum/minimum value is based on the variable type.
h) OK: Saves the changes and closes the window.
i) Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes.
j) Select Variable: Finds a specific variable on the variable list.
k) Condition: Makes the break engaged when writing the value or reading the
value from address.

Variable break run


Perform the following steps to set variable break run.

Step Action
1 Specify the variable break.
2 On the menu, click Debug > Go. PLC runs debugging.
3 If specified variable break conditions are met, a message displays to inform
that the variable break is engaged, when PLC stops running.

364 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break

ATTENTION
• Among variable types, BYTE, NIBBLE, and STRING do not support the
variable break instruction.
• When the PLC is in debug mode, the meeting of any one condition
(breakpoint, variable break, scan break, and so on), applies the break.
• Click the program name to move to the program position where the
variable break is applied.

• If the value is changed in other application programs (such as address


monitor) other than the specified program, movement to the program
position where the variable break is applied may not be possible.

13.5 Scan break


This function is used to run PLC as many times as the scan times specified, and apply the
break.
Perform the following steps to use the Scan Break function.

Step Action
1 On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition
window displays.
2 Select Scan Break point tab.

a) Use Scan Break point: If you do not select this check box, the specified
scan break times even if saved, is not run while PLC runs debugging.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 365


January 2011 Honeywell
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break

Step Action
b) Scan Count: Used to enter scan times to apply the break. 1 ~
2147483647 is available for the setting value.

Scan break run


Perform the following steps to apply scan break.

Step Action
1 Select Use Scan Break and specify the scan times to apply the break.
2 If you select Debug > Go, PLC runs debugging.
3 PLC informs that the scan break is engaged after executing as many as
specified scan times.

366 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
14. Online Editing
14.1 Online editing sequence
This Online Editing function is used to edit the PLC program with PLC operation status
in RUN mode.

Open Project

Connect

Start Monitoring

* 프로그램
Start 창이
Online Editing * Start Online Editing starts after active.

Edit
* Start Online Editing and Write Modified Program can be repeated.

Write Modified
Program

End Online Editing

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 367


January 2011 Honeywell
14. Online Editing
14.1. Online editing sequence

Open project
− Click Project > Open Project. Opens the project identical to the PLC project to
perform Online Editing.
or
− Click Project > Open from PLC.

Connect
− Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC.

Start monitoring

− Click Monitor > Start Monitoring.


− Online Editing is available while monitoring.
− Start/Stop Monitoring is available during Online Editing.

Start online editing


− Click Online > Start Online Editing.
− Online editing is available after its program window is active and the program is
selected.
− After Program or Variable is edited during Run, the program window changes to
edit mode during Run.

368 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
14. Online Editing
14.1. Online editing sequence

− If Online Editing starts, the background color of the program can be changed
through its applicable option.

Edit
− Online Editing is the same as specified in the off-line Edit.
− In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (‘*’).

Write modified program


− Click Online > Write Modified Program.
− The applicable program only is transferred to PLC.
− In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (‘*’).

End online editing


− Click Online > End Online Editing.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 369


January 2011 Honeywell
14. Online Editing
14.1. Online editing sequence

ATTENTION
− Project cannot be closed during Online Edit.

− One or more programs can be modified during Run.


− While editing during Run, the monitoring value is not correct.
− For the items to edit during Run, refer to the followings:

(Edit item means add, delete, and change are available)

Item Description Edit Item Description Edit

Add X Add ○
User-defined
Project properties Delete X function/function Delete X
block
Change X Change X

Add X LD Edit ○

Program Delete X IL Edit X

Change ○ SFC Edit X

Add ○ Add X

Global variable Delete X SFC action (LD) Delete X

Change X Change ○

Add ○ Add X
SFC Transition
Local variable Delete ○ Delete X
(LD)
Change ○ Change ○

Add ○ Parameter change Edit X

Local variable
Delete X Edit ○
User-defined type retain setting

Global variable
Change X Edit X
retain setting

370 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
15. Printing
15.1 Print project
Printing a project
This instruction is used to print the contents of a project sequentially.
It is also used to select items to be printed, specify necessary setting options for printing
per item, and execute Preview and Print instruction.
To print the contents of a project:
• Click Project > Print Project. The Print Project window displays.

a) Project Level Diagram: Displays tree structure of the item printable in the
Project. Detailed setting functions are available in the tree structure of the
Level Diagram. Print and Previous View functions are available for the
selected item.
b) Print: Prints the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.
c) Save Selection Item: Saves the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 371


January 2011 Honeywell
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

d) Details: Used to specify details of the selected item in the Project Level
Diagram.
e) Preview: Used to view the selected item before print in the Project Level
Diagram.
f) Settings: Sets the general print options such as Printer Setting, Print Page
Setting, Margin Setting, and so on.

ATTENTION
− Details button in the Project Level Tree is enabled only if you select
the Cover, Program, I/O parameter.
− Refer to each print option for setting each item in detail (Program
Print Setting  Program Print).

− Address and Memory Reference used in the Project Level Diagram


are identical to those on the window displayed when View > Used
Address and View > Cross Reference are executed on the menu.

Print setting
It is used to specify paper to print on and the printer.
• Click Settings>Page Setup on the Print Project window or right-click on the Print
Project window and select Page Setup from the context menu.

.
a) Details: Refer to Print Setting for each item.
b) Page Setup: Used to specify the page setup of the paper to print on.
c) Header/Footer: Used to enter string displayed on the Header and Footer.

Page setup
It is used to specify margins of paper to print.
Perform the following steps to specify the Page setup:

372 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

Step Action
1 Click Printer Settings on the Print window.
2 Select Page Setup from the context menu. The Page Setup window
displays.

a) Shows how the page layout will look.


b) Size: Used to select paper to print on.
c) Orientation: Used to select a printing direction.
d) Back to Default: Details of Margins, Header and Footer are changed
back to default, sets the basic value specified when the program is
installed.
e) Margin Setting: Specifies margins of paper printed.
f) Printer: Used to change the setting options of the printer.

ATTENTION
− Ensure that print contents do not overwrite with header or footer
when printed, with respect to margins.
− If there are no contents in header/footer, the header/footer is not

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 373


January 2011 Honeywell
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

printed.

Header/footer setting
It is used to specify the content of Header/Footer.

.
a) Content Setting: used to enter the content in the left/center/right of the
Header/Footer.
b) Insert Field: used to insert the field into the position of the cursor currently
placed on the Edit Box (left, center, right).

374 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

ATTENTION
− If the content of the header/footer is long, the header/footer in the left,
center or right may be printed as overwritten with each other.
− The user can specify the content of the header/footer using Input and
Field at the same time.
Example: If the content of ‘The date today is &d’ is input on the
header/footer  ‘The date today is 2004-06-01’ is printed.
− Field Content
− Date: &d  yyyy-mm-dd
− Time: &t  hh:mm:ss

− Project name: &p


− PLC name: &c
− PLC type: &T
− Page number/Total Page number: &n  Page number/Total Page
number of the selected items.
− Page number/Item page number: &N  Page number/Item page
number of one item.
− Program name: &P  displays only in program print mode.
− File Name: &f  file name of the current project.
− Path and file name: &F  file name displayed with its directory route.

− Project comment: &C  Project comment is printed if any. If the


comment is too long may not be correctly printed.

Cover setup
It is used to specify the print cover.
Perform the following steps to specify the print cover.

Step Action
1 Select Cover in the Project Level Diagram on the Print Project window.
2 Right-click Cover and select Details or click or press Enter key. The Cover
Setup window displays.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 375


January 2011 Honeywell
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

Step Action

The field descriptions for Cover Setup window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Cover Paper Default is A4 vertical. Printed differently based on the


paper setup. If the Edit Box exceeds the paper, the
exceeded area is not printed.

Margin Display Displays the specified margins with a dotted line.

Edit Box Displays the content printed on the cover, where the
content, font, and position can be changed.

Edit Used to edit the content of the currently selected Edit


Box. Double-click the Edit Box or press Enter key
when the Edit Box is selected to edit. If the field is
inserted, Edit is also available.

Font Changes font of the currently selected Edit Box.

Add Adds a new Edit Box to the print cover.

376 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project

Step Action

Delete Deletes the currently selected Edit Box.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Add content
Perform the following steps to add content.

Step Action
1 On the Cover Setup window, right-click and select Add from context menu.
2 Move the mouse on the Cover setup page. The mouse cursor changes.
3 Click on Cover setup page to view an Edit dialog box. Edit the required text.
4 Press ESC to change the mouse cursor to the arrow shape again.

ATTENTION
− Edit Box can be aligned in the page. It is available through the menu,
right-click and select the alignment from the context menu.

− Edit Box > Center: aligns the selected Edit Box to the center of
page.
− String > left Align: aligns the content of the selected Edit Box to the
left of the page.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 377


January 2011 Honeywell
15. Printing
15.2. LD program print

− The edge of the Edit Box is not printed.

− Edit Box can be moved by Drag and Drop instruction of the mouse
or with the arrow keys.
− Undo and Redo are not available.

− If string including field is previously viewed, the field is displayed as


analyzed. If edited, the field is displayed back.

15.2 LD program print


It is used to print the selected LD program.

Print setting
Perform the following steps to configure the print setting.

Step Action

1 Select the program item to print.


2 Click Project > Print. The Print Setup window displays.

The field descriptions for Print Setup window are as follows:


378 SoftMaster User's Guide R200
Honeywell January 2011
15. Printing
15.2. LD program print

Step Action

Field Label Description

Select Program Selects a program to print. In LD program, you


cannot select IL program print.

View Options Used to specify View Options for printing. Refer


to Viewing program options for each View
Option.

Contact Used to specify the number of contacts in a line.


The number of contact is fixed to the number
currently displayed, if printing is executed in the
LD program.

Print Range Used to specify print range.

Print in Color Used to decide whether print is in color or not. If


you select the check box, the print is in color,
and if you do not select, it is in black-and-white.

Print Grid Used to decide whether to apply Grid Print or


not.

Print Output Comment Used to print output comment.

Print Starts to print with the currently specified


options applied.

OK Click to save the currently specified options and


to close the window.

Cancel Click to close the window.

Print Setting Used to specify the printer setup options.

Page Setting Used to invoke Page Setup window. The size


of paper and space of print page can be setup
in the Page Setup window.

ATTENTION
When printing the project, click Details after selecting the program name to
set print setup.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 379


January 2011 Honeywell
15. Printing
15.2. LD program print

Print preview
It is used to see the preview of the specified print job.
• Click Project > Preview.

380 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
16. User Function/Function Block
16.1 Overview
You can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The User Function/Function Block can be created as follows:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 381


January 2011 Honeywell
16. User Function/Function Block
16.2. Create user function/function block

16.2 Create user function/function block


Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block.

Step Action
1 Click Project > Add Item >-Function.

or

Click Project > Add Item > Function Block.

The User Function/Function Block window displays.

The field descriptions for User Function/Function Block window are as


follows:

Field Label Description

Program Name Used for entering a User Function/Function Block.


When the user-defined function/function is
registered, the input name is registered.

Language Used for selecting a programming language for the


User Function/Function Block. A user-defined
function is created only by the LD language while a
user-defined function block can be created by the
LD, SFC, or ST language.

Use EN/ENO Used for selecting whether to use or not use


EN/ENO, which is used under the operation
condition of function/function block. If you do not
select EN/ENO, you should declare BOOL type
variable in the first input and first output parameters
of the function/function block.
Return Data Type Designates the type of the results after a user-
defined function is executed. It is activated only
when a user-defined function is created.

Program Used for entering the comment for a User


description Function/Function Block. Unnecessarily do not
enter comment.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the window.

Cancel Click to cancel the changes and to close the


window.

382 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
16. User Function/Function Block
16.3. Create user function/function block I/O variable

Step Action

ATTENTION
If you click OK, a new item with the name entered in the item of User
Function/Function Block creates.

16.3 Create user function/function block I/O variable


Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block I/O variable.

Step Action
1 Double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of User
Function/Function Block, the following local variable window displays.

a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable representing the value of user-defined


function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of
the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a
user-defined function.
b) Function type: Used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,
function/function block type by output variable in the local variable
window. The type is same as when using the User Function/Function
Block in the scan program.
2 Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed on the local variable window.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 383


January 2011 Honeywell
16. User Function/Function Block
16.4. User function/function block programming

Step Action

ATTENTION
Minimum input variable and output variable must be at least one.
But, the maximum number is limited to 32.

16.4 User function/function block programming


Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block programming.

Step Action
1 Double-click a program among the items created with the newly created User
Function/Function Block, a program window with the previously designated
language appears.

The following window shows the screen created when selecting the LD.

384 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
16. User Function/Function Block
16.4. User function/function block programming

Step Action

2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window.

ATTENTION
If local variable edit and program edit are completed, select
function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the
edited User Function/Function Block is registered.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 385


January 2011 Honeywell
16. User Function/Function Block
16.5. Working with user function/function block

16.5 Working with user function/function block


Perform the following steps to use user function/function block.

Step Action
1 Open the program to use a User Function/Function Block and move the
cursor to the position to input.
2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.

3 Select a User Function/Function Block in the function/function block tool bar.


The Function/Function Block window displays.
4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

386 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)
Features of SoftMaster-SIM
SoftMaster-SIM is a simulated PLC for MasterLogic PLC series. If using the SoftMaster-
SIM, you can run your program without the PLC, or you can debug a PLC program by
using input condition setting or module simulation function.
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following function:
• Program simulation
You can simulate the program written by LD/SFC/ST in the SoftMaster. It supports
online editing by which you can edit during RUN mode and debugging function by
which you can trace the program as step unit.
• PLC online function
You can use program monitoring function and online diagnosis function such as system
monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace, and custom events.
• Module simulation
You can simulate the digital I/O module, A/D conversion module, D/A conversion
module, counter, temperature control module, positioning module. By using simulation
function, you can set the input value of each module.
• I/O input condition setting
You can set address value by setting specific address value or channel value of the
module as input condition. If you use I/O input condition setting, you need not write
other program to test PLC program.

System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM


The system configuration required by SoftMaster-SIM is higher than that of SoftMaster.
Minimum specification: Pentium 3900MHz, RAM 256MB.
Recommended specification: Pentium 4, 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB and more.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 387


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)

ATTENTION
In case of minimum specification, the fixed period scan may not operate
properly because scan period may be longer than the fixed period and
disconnection may occur. Despite using recommended specification, if
system load is heavy, same phenomenon may occur. And regardless of
system specification, according to user setting like system’s SLEEP mode,
disconnection can occur.

When using fixed period, fixed period error/warning dialog box may not
display.

Starting SoftMaster-SIM
Perform the following steps to start SoftMaster-SIM.

Step Action
1 Start SoftMaster and write the program to execute through the SoftMaster-
SIM.

2 On the SoftMaster menu, click Tools > Start Simulator. If SoftMaster-SIM is


executed, the program is downloaded into SoftMaster-SIM automatically. If
SoftMaster-SIM is executed, status becomes online, connection, stop.

3 Click Online > Change Mode > Run and execute the download program.
When using SoftMaster-SIM, for online menu supported by SoftMaster, refer
to the following table.

388 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)

Menu items support Menu items support

Open from PLC ○ Fault mask Ⅹ

Module changing
Change Mode (Run) ○ Ⅹ
wizard

Change Mode (Stop) ○ Start online editing ○

Change Mode (Debug) ○ Write modified program ○

Disconnect Ⅹ End online editing ○

Read Ⅹ Start/stop monitoring ○

Write ○ Pause ○

Compare with PLC Ⅹ Resume ○

Set Flash Memory (Set) Ⅹ Pausing conditions ○

Set Flash Memory


Ⅹ Change current value ○
(Remove)

Reset PLC Ⅹ System monitoring ○

Clear PLC ○ Address monitoring ○

Special module
PLC Information (CPU) ○ ○
monitoring

PLC Information
○ Custom events ○
(Performance)

PLC Information
○ Data traces ○
(Password)

PLC Information (PLC


○ Start/stop debugging ○
RTC)

PLC History (Error Log) ○ Debug (Go) ○

PLC History (Mode


○ Debug (Step Over) ○
Log)

PLC History (Shut down


○ Debug (Step Into) ○
Log)

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 389


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)

Menu items support Menu items support

PLC History (System


○ Debug (Step Out) ○
Log)

PLC errors/warnings ○ Debug (Go to Cursor) ○

Set/Remove
I/O Information ○ ○
Breakpoints

Force I/O ○ Breakpoints list ○

Skip I/O ○ Breakpoint conditions ○

390 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

17.2 Program window configuration


Configuring the program window
The following figure displays the typical SoftMaster-SIM window.

1. Channel list
Displays favorite channels according to module and channel. In case of module, displays
only module set in I/O parameter. In module, B0 means base number and S00 means slot
number.
2. I/O condition
Displays single I/O condition and continuous I/O condition.
Displays simulator’s status:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 391


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Status Description Window

Displays initial status. Connection by


Initial conditions
simulator is not available.

Connection It means connection is ready and


available turns on red LED.

It means Single I/O condition is


Single I/O condition
under execution. Under execution,
execution
green LED flickers.

It means Continuous I/O is under


Continuous I/O
execution. Under execution, yellow
condition execution
LED flicker.

Channel list

Module channel
In tree view, double-click the channel you want to read. If you use specific channel as
favorite channel, select favorite channel check box.

392 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Channel monitor
Perform the following steps to monitor a channel.

Step Action

Start monitoring:
1 Click Tool > Start channel monitoring.

To modify channel current value:


1 Select the channel you want to modify the current value.
2 In the selected channel, move to the current value column
3 Double-click or press Enter. The Channel Value Modification dialog box
displays.

Module Name: displays the module name.

Channel Name: displays the channel name.

Channel type: displays the data type of the selected channel.

Bit value: in case of bit type, select off/on.

Input Value: in case it is not bit type, input the value directly.

In case the value is output value, you cannot change the current value of
each channel.

Stop channel monitoring:


1 Click Tool > Stop channel monitoring.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 393


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

I/O condition
I/O condition is used to write a specific value to specific address when specific condition
is met by user input. For example, if address %IX0.0.0 becomes 1, set address
%MX0~%MX100 as 1.
The user should modify address value periodically by using the ‘monitor current value of
SoftMaster’ or write other PLC program to test PLC program. SoftMaster-SIM support
reflects the data yielded to a module or entered from a module to a program.

Condition expression
Displays condition expression used in the single input condition and continuous
condition. One condition expression consists of more than one condition by combination
of conditions.
Type Operator Priority Contents

== 4 Equal

!= 5 Not equal

> 6 Greater than


Comparison
>= 7 Greater than or equal to

<= 8 Less than or equal to

< 9 Less than

+ 2 Add

Numerical - 3 Subtract
operation * 0 Multiply

/ 1 Division

& 12 Bit multiply


Bit
| 13 Bit sum
operation
^ 14 Exclusive bit sum

394 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Type Operator Priority Contents

Logical && 10 Logical multiply


operation || 11 Logical sum

( -
ETC.
) -

Comparison target is address or channel.


For example, if you write ‘address %MW0 is larger than 100 and %M10 is on’ as
condition expression, the condition expression is as follows:
(%MW0 > 100) && (%MX10 == TRUE)
It supports five addresses such as %I, %Q, %M, %R, %W.

Basic functions
Single I/O condition and continuous I/O has the following interface.

Adding I/O condition


Perform the following steps to add an I/O condition.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to the position to add a new I/O condition.
2 Click Edit > Properties.
3 Edit I/O condition and click OK.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 395


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Step Action

Edit I/O condition


Perform the following steps to edit an I/O condition.

Step Action
1 Select an I/O condition to edit.
2 Click Edit > Properties.
3 Modify the items in the I/O condition dialog box and click OK.

Cut/Paste I/O condition


Perform the following steps to cut/paste an I/O condition.

Step Action
1 Select I/O condition to cut.
2 Click Edit > Cut.
3 Move to the position to paste, click Edit > Paste.

396 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Copy/Paste I/O condition


Perform the following steps to copy/paste an I/O condition.

Step Action
1 Select I//O condition to copy.
2 Click Edit > Copy.
3 Move to position to paste, click Edit > Paste.

Delete I/O condition


Perform the following steps to delete an I/O condition.

Step Action
1 Select I/O condition to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete.

Insert line
Perform the following steps to insert a line.

Step Action
1 Select line to insert.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 397


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Step Action
2 Click Edit > Insert Line.

Delete line
Perform the following steps to delete a line.

Step Action
1 Select the position you want to delete.
2 Click Edit > Delete Line.

Single I/O condition


In single I/O condition, if execution option is satisfied, copy the value to the selected
Address/Channel. In the tree view, click Single I/O Condition. The Single I/O
Condition window displays.

398 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Use condition Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do


not select this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use
the condition set by user.

Name Used to enter I/O condition’s name.

Description Used to enter a description about I/O condition.

Always execute Regardless of condition set by user, it executes


Output Setting when it starts.

Execution by button Executes Output Setting when you press the button.

Execution by condition Executes Output Setting when it satisfies the


expression condition expression set by user.

View Channel Browser Displays channel browser. It is activated when you


select the Execution by condition expression.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 399


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Output Setting Tab:

a) Address/Channel: Inputs channel or address name to register.


b) Set value: Inputs setting value. Values available are: Address, channel, and
constant.

Continuous I/O condition


In the continuous I/O condition, when the condition is met, enter the value to the selected
address/channel in every scan continuously. . In the tree view, click Continuous I/O
Condition. The Continuous I/O Condition window displays.

The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows:

400 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Field Label Description

Use condition Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do


not enable this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use
the condition set by user.

Name Used to enter name of the I/O condition.

Description Used to enter a description of the I/O condition.

Always execute Regardless of condition set by user, it executes


Output Setting when it starts.

Execution by button Used to execute the Output Setting when you press
the button.

Execution by condition It executes Output Setting when it meets the


expression condition expression set by user.

View Channel Browser Displays channel browser. It is activated when you


select the Execution by condition.

Output Setting Tab:

Field Label Description

Repeated Execution Select to enter the output value repeatedly.

Ignore Condition while Select whether to check the operating condition or not.
execution

Output setting Displays continuous value setting dialog box.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 401


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION

When setting continuous I/O, it writes the value in the continuous value
setting to each address/channel. If you set the Ignore Condition during
execution, only the first value is written. If ‘Always Execute’ is set, all the
values are written in sequence. And if you set repeated value, it writes value
repeatedly.

Continuous value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
no.
Value 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

For example,

① not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated


Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false)

7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7

② not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated


Execution (Always execution / condition is true)

7→6→5→4→3→2→1

③ setting Ignore Condition while execution / not setting Repeated Execution

7→6→5→4→3→2→1

④ not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution


(Execution by button / condition expression is false)

7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→7→…

402 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

⑤ not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution


(always execution / condition is true)

7→6→5→4→3→2→1→7→6→5→4→3→2→1→…

⑥ setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution

7→6→5→4→3→2→1→7→6→5→4→3→2→1→…

Continuous value setting dialog box


Input setting value
Enter the value to set as output value in the continuous I/O condition.

The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Address/channel Enter the address or channel to set value.

Value Enter only constant such as integer, real, and


hexadecimal.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 403


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Field Label Description

OK Click to saves the changes and to close the dialog


box.

Cancel Click to cancel the changes without saving.

Set continuous value


Select address or channel to enter continuous value.
Perform the following steps to enter a continuous value.

Step Action
1 Double-click the column to enter address/channel.
2 The Channel/Address Name dialog box appears.
3 Enter address or channel and click OK.

The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Channel/Address Name Used to enter channel or address.

View Channel Browser Displays the channel browser.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to cancel the changes without saving.

404 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Input value
Perform the following steps to enter values.

Step Action
1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, move the cursor to the
position to enter the value.
2 Enter the value.

Auto fill
Perform the following steps to auto fill.

Step Action
1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, select the area to be copied.

2 Move the cursor to the corner, cursor changes.


3 Drag the cursor down with left mouse button pressed.

ATTENTION
− If you use control key for auto fill, you can input the value according
to mouse drag direction.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 405


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

I/O condition monitor

Start monitoring
To start monitoring:
• On the menu, click Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.

End monitoring
To end monitoring:
• On the menu, Cancel Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.

406 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION
Program is executed from first step to last step repeatedly and this process is
called as scan program. SoftMaster-SIM is also executed through scan and
has the following process.

Module simulation
SoftMaster-SIM supports simple simulation function for the I/O module and special
module. In case of digital I/O module, it supports I/O function about I or Q area and in
case of special module it supports monitoring function such as analog input or output
value monitoring.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 407


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Setting of module
All simulation function in the SoftMaster-SIM uses information set in the I/O parameter.
Hence, ensure that you set each module in the I/O parameter to simulate module and
reflect it to program.
For example, in order to simulate the following PLC system, set the I/O parameter as
follows:
Base Slot Module name Module type

DC 2
Basic base 0 2MLI-D21A
4V input 8 points

Voltage type A/D conversion


Basic base 1 2MLF-AV8A
module (8 channels)

Open collector type high-


Basic base 2 2MLF-HO2A
speed module (2 channels)

After executing the SoftMaster-SIM, the module set in the I/O parameter displays as
follows in System Monitoring.

408 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION
To apply I/O parameter set in the SoftMaster, download I/O parameter to
SoftMaster-SIM. In case the module has been changed, re-launch
SoftMaster-SIM module and execute the SoftMaster-SIM again.

Digital I/O module


In the digital I/O module’s simulation, you can change contact point’s current value or
check if output is normal. According to I/O module setting in I/O parameter, it has the
following characteristics.

Not Setting I/O module Setting I/O Module

Modification of the Modification of the


Modification of input value monitor current value is SoftMaster-SIM channel
available. value is available.

Modification of output
Not available Not available
value

Forced I/O input Not applied Applied

Not applied Applied

Analog input module (A/D conversion module)


SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input module.

Module Name Support

2MLF-AV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) ○

2MLF-AC8A (Current type 8 channel) ○

2MLF-AD4S (Isolation type 4 channel) Ⅹ

SoftMaster-SIM supports four types of input voltage range and digital data output format
and two types of input current range. It is as follows.

Input Voltage Range Input Current Range Digital Data Output


Format

1 ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA 0 ~ 16000

0 ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA -8000 ~ 8000

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 409


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Input Voltage Range Input Current Range Digital Data Output


Format

0 ~ 10V - 1000 ~ 5000

-10 ~ 10V - 0 ~ 10000 (%)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input parameters.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Operation channel ○ Filter constant ○

Input voltage(current) ○
○ Filter process
range

Output data type ○ Average method ○

Filter process Ⅹ Average value ○

You can set analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window and input range is
effective within voltage (current) set in parameter.

ATTENTION
For the analog module’s parameter setting and how to use the program, refer
to the user’s guide of each module.

You can set the analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window.

Analog output module (D/A conversion module)


SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output module.

Module Name Support

2MLF-DV4A (Voltage type 4 channel) ○

2MLF -DV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) ○

2MLF -DC4A (Current type 4 channel) ○

2MLF -DC8A (Current type 8 channel) ○

410 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Module Name Support

2MLF -DV4S (Isolation type voltage Ⅹ


output 4 channel)

2MLF -DC4S (Isolation type current Ⅹ


output 4 channel)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following voltage (current) range and input data type.

Input Data Type Output Voltage Range Output Current Range

0 ~ 16000 1 ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA

-8000 ~ 8000 0 ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA

1000 ~ 5000 0 ~ 10V -

0 ~ 10000 (%) -10 ~ 10V -

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output parameter.

Parameter Support

Operation channel ○

Output voltage (current) range ○

Input data type ○

Channel output status Ⅹ

You can input digital input value through special module variable and it is effective
within the range set in the parameter.

ATTENTION
For analog output module’s parameter and how to use the program, refer to
the user’s guide of each module.

You can check the changed analog output value in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s
channel item.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 411


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

High-speed counter module (HSC Module)


The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter module.

Module Name Support

2MLF -HO2A (Open collector 2 channel) ○

2MLF -HD2A (Open driver 2 channel) ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter parameter.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Comparison output 0 maximum ○


Count mode Ⅹ
setting value

Comparison output 1 minimum ○


Pulse input mode Ⅹ
setting value

Comparison output 0 maximum ○


Preset ○
setting value

Ring counter minimum value Ⅹ Output status setting ○

Ring counter maximum value Ⅹ Additional function mode Ⅹ

Comparison output 0 mode ○ Section setting value (ms) Ⅹ

Comparison output 1 mode ○ Pulse number per 1 cycle Ⅹ

Comparison output 0 Ⅹ
○ Frequency display mode
minimum setting value

412 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION
− For parameter specific contents of high-speed counter module and
how to use the program, refer to the user’s guide of each module.

In the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item, you can change current count value.
High-speed counter simulation, compare the input count value with parameter setting
value and use it as comparison output signal.

RTD module
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following RTD module.

Module Name Support

2MLF -RD4A (4 channel) ○

2MLF -RD4S (Isolation type 4 channels) Ⅹ

2MLF -TC4S (Isolation type 4 channels) Ⅹ

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following temperature input parameter.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Operation channel ○ Process Alarm High-High Limit Ⅹ

Sensor type ○ Process Alarm High Limit Ⅹ

Temperature unit ○ Process Alarm Low Limit Ⅹ

Filter constant Ⅹ Process Alarm Low-Low Limit Ⅹ

Average process Ⅹ Process Alarm Hysteresis Ⅹ

Ⅹ Input variation alarm setting Ⅹ


Average value
type

Ⅹ Input variation alarm Upper Ⅹ


Scaling data type
Limit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 413


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Ⅹ Input variation alarm Lower Ⅹ


Scaling minimum value
Limit

Ⅹ Input variation alarm detection Ⅹ


Scaling maximum value
Cycle

ATTENTION
For parameter specific content of RTD module and how to use the program,
refer to the user’s guide of each module.

You can set temperature input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item.

Advanced positioning module (APM module)

ATTENTION
In the SoftMaster-SIM, it cannot support the full function of APM function. The
APM module of SoftMaster-SIM is made to help you understand the function
block related with APM and its program operation and error may be different
with real PLC. SoftMaster-SIM supports part of error related with APM, some
error may occur in real PLC. The following is APM function block list that
SoftMaster-SIM supports.

For position module supported by SoftMaster-SIM, refer to the following table.

Module Name Support

2MLF -PO1A (Open collector 1 axis) ○

2MLF -PO2A (Open collector 2 axis) ○

2MLF -PO3A (Open Collector 3 axis) ○

2MLF -PD1A (Line Driver 1 axis) ○

414 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Module Name Support

2MLF -PD2A (Line Driver 2 axis) ○

2MLF -PD3A (Line Driver 3 axis) ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following step data parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Coordinate Ⅹ Circular interpolation sub Ⅹ


address [pulse]

Control method ○ M code Ⅹ

Operation pattern ○ ACC/DEC Number Ⅹ

Operation method Ⅹ Operation speed ○

Target position [pulse] ○ Dwell time Ⅹ

Circular interpolation Ⅹ - -
direction

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following operating parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter type Item Support

Basic parameter Bias speed ○

Extension parameter External command selection ○

External command ○

External stop ○

External contemporary start ○

External speed/position

conversion

Origin/manual parameter Origin address X

Home high speed X

Home low speed X

Origin/Manual parameter JOG high speed ○

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 415


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Parameter type Item Support

JOG low speed ○

Inching speed ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following APM exclusive function block.

Function Block Command Support

APM_ORG Homing start X

APM_FLT Floating origin setting ○

APM_DST Direct start ○

APM_IST Indirect start ○

APM_LIN Linear interpolation start X

APM_CIN Circular interpolation start X

APM_SST Simultaneous start ○

Speed/position
APM_VTP X
conversion

APM_PTV Position/speed conversion X

APM_STP Stop ○

APM_SKP Skip operation ○

APM_SSP Position sync. X

APM_SSS Speed sync. ○

APM_POR Position override ○

APM_SOR Speed override ○

Speed override with


APM_PSO X
position

APM_NMV Continuous operation ○

APM_INCH Inching start ○

Manual operation
APM_RTP ○
previous location return

416 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Function Block Command Support

Start step number


APM_SNS ○
modification

Repeated step number


APM_SRS ○
modification

APM_MOF M code off ○

APM_PRS Current position preset ○

APM_ZONE ZONE output allowance ○

APM_EPRS Encoder preset ○

Teaching function block - X

APM_EMG Emergency stop ○

APM_CLR Error reset ○

APM_PST Point operation X

Point operation step data


APM_PWR X
setting

APM_SRD Read current status ○

Read operation status


APM_CRD ○
code information

APM_ENCRD Read encoder value X

APM_JOG JOG start X

APM_MPG Manual pulse operation X

The following is APM command error code in the SoftMaster-SIM.

Error code Meaning

151 Operating data’s operating speed cannot be set as 0.

221 Direct start command cannot be executed during operation.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 417


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

Error code Meaning

Direct start command cannot be executed in the absolute


224
coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

231 Indirect start command cannot be executed during operation.

Indirect start command cannot be executed in the absolute


234
coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

Contemporary start command cannot be executed during


291
operation.

Contemporary start command cannot be executed in the absolute


294
coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

Decreased speed stop command can be executed during


321
operation.

331 Skip command can be executed during operation.

There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous command’s


355
master/slave axis.

There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous command’s


356
master/slave axis rate.

361 Position override command can be executed during operation.

371 Speed override command can be executed during operation.

Continuous operation command can be executed during


391
operation.

401 Inching command cannot be executed during operation.

Auto operation point return command cannot be executed during


431
operation.

Start step number modification command cannot be executed


441
during operation.

461 Position teaching command cannot be executed during operation.

481 Inner emergency stop.

418 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION
− Positioning module specific parameter is set in the APM package. To
set parameter used in the positioning module, set operating
parameter in the APM package and save project file as follows. And
APM project file should be in the SoftMaster project file folder.

BxSyz.apm (x base number, yz slot number, no distinction between small and


capital letters).

Base Slot Project Storage


Name

0 0 B0S0.apm

0 10 B0S10.apm

1 0 B1S0.apm

1 11 B1S11.apm

2 0 B2S0.apm

2 12 B2S12.apm

− For specific parameter setting of APM module, refer to the APM


package user’s guide.

You can check APM module’s status in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 419


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.2. Program window configuration

ATTENTION
− Meaning of channel name of positioning module is as follows:
(Example: X axis standard)

Channel Name Meaning

Upper 16 bit among X-


XCurrentPosH axis current position
value

Lower16 bit among X-


XCurrentPosL axis current position
value

Upper 16 bit among X-


XCurrentVelH
axis current speed value

Lower 16 bit among X-


XCurrentVelL
axis current speed value

420 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.3. Limitations

17.3 Limitations
SoftMaster-SIM has the following limitations in comparison with real PLC.

Watchdog timer
In 2MLI PLC, you can set watchdog timer to prevent error. But in SoftMaster-SIM, it
does not work properly because scan time in SoftMaster-SIM is longer than that in PLC.

Communication module
SoftMaster-SIM does not support function related with communication module. So the
following function block does not work and is saved in SoftMaster-SIM.

Category Name Function

Station address setting P2PSN Sets other station address

Reading area setting Sets BIT data reading


P2PRD_BOOL
(BOOL) area

Reading area setting Sets BYTE data reading


P2PRD_BYTE
(BYTE) area

Reading area setting Sets WORD data reading


P2PRD_WORD
(WORD) area

Reading area setting Sets DWORD data


P2PRD_DWORD
(DWORD) reading area

Reading area setting Sets LWORD data


P2PRD_LWORD
(LWORD) reading area

Writing area setting


P2PWR_BOOL Sets BIT data writing area
(BOOL)

Writing area setting Sets BYTE data writing


P2PWR_BYTE
(BYTE) area

Writing area setting Sets WORD data writing


P2PWR_WORD
(WORD) area

Writing area setting Sets DWORD data writing


P2PWR_DWORD
(DWORD) area

Writing area setting Sets LWORD data writing


P2PWR_LWORD
(LWORD) area

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 421


January 2011 Honeywell
17. SoftMaster Simulator
17.3. Limitations

422 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.1 Writing ST program
ST based on character is a program language and conforms to IEC 61131-3.
Scan program, user function/FB, SFC can be written by ST language.

Adding scan program


Perform the following steps to add a scan program.

Step Action
1 Select Scan Program in the project window.
2 Click Project > Add item > Program. The Program window displays.
3 Select Language as ST, enter program name and description.

Adding user function/function block


Perform the following steps to add a user function/function block.

Step Action
1 Select User Function/Function Block in the project window.
2 Click Project > Add Item > Function or Function Block. The User
Function/Function Block window displays.
3 Enter the name and description. Select ST as Language. In case of Function,
select Return data type.

Adding SFC transition, action

Adding SFC transition


Perform the following steps to add transition.

Step Action
1 Select the transition in which you want to input program in SFC program.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 423


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.1. Writing ST program

Step Action

2 After you select the transition, double-click or press Enter. The Transition
Properties window displays.
3 Enter the name and comment.
4 Select Type as Program.
5 Select Language as ST in Add Program window.

Perform the following steps to add an action.

Step Action
1 Enter the Name and Comment.
2 Select Type as Program in the Action Properties window.
3 Select Language as ST in the Add Program window.

424 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.2. Limit

18.2 Limit
When editing ST language, the limit is as described below.
Item Content Limit

Maximum number
Maximum number of character in one line is
of character in one 2048
2048 for English and 1024 for Korean.
line

ATTENTION
• Only one scan program is available.
• Language of User Function/Function Block, SFC transition and action
can be different from language of scan program.
• Program written in other languages cannot be converted.

18.3 Editing program


Shortcut keys
The followings are the shortcut keys.
You can change shortcut key using Tools > Shortcut key Settings.
Action Shortcut Key Description

Copy Ctrl + C Copies selected character string.

Paste Ctrl + V Pastes copied character string.

Delete Del Deletes selected character string.

Cut Ctrl + X Copies selected character string and deletes it.

Undo Ctrl + Z Cancels the changes.

Redo Ctrl + Y Cancels Redo action.

Select All Ctrl + A Selects all character strings.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 425


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing program

Copy/paste
Copies selected character string into clipboard and pastes it.
Perform the following steps to copy and paste the character string.

Step Action
1 Select the character string to copy.
2 Click Edit > Copy.
3 Move to location to paste the copied character string.
4 Click Edit > Paste.

ATTENTION
• Clipboard: memory area of PC to save temporary information.
• When parting, if you select the area, the character string is
overwritten and if you do not select the area, it is inserted.
• Only text is pasted.

Undo/redo
Undo cancels edition and Redo cancels Undo action.
Perform the following steps to do Undo and Redo actions.

Step Action
1 After executing Paste, click Edit > Undo.

Pasted contents are deleted.


2 Click Edit > Redo.

Paste action is executed again.

426 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing program

Adding/selecting variable
Enter a variable at the selected location.
Perform the following steps to add or select variable.

Step Action
1 After moving the cursor, click Edit > Select/Add Variable. The Select
Variable window displays.

The field description for Select Variable window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Variable Enter the name of direct variable or declared


variable. If the entered character string is
variable type and is not registered as variable,
Variable Addition/Edit dialog box appears.

Local variable Displays the declared local variable list.

Direct variable Displays direct variable comment.


Flag Displays flag in the list. Type of flag list can be
selected in List.

List Displays type of flag list. There is system/high-


speed link/P2P/PID.

All Select whether to display only flags related


with Parameter number, Block index or not.

Parameter number Enter number to sort flags. 0~12 for high-


speed link, 0~12 for P2P, 0~63 for PID.

Block index Enter number to sort flags. 0~127 for high-


speed link, 0~63 for P2P.

Global Variable Displays global variable list. It is available to


register as EXTERNAL variable.

New Variable Invokes a dialog box to add variable to local


variable list.

Edit Variable Invokes a dialog box to edit the selected


variable.

Delete Variable Deletes the selected local variable from local


variable list.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 427


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing program

Step Action

OK Click to saves the entered or selected items


and to close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to closes the dialog box.

When you select, add a new variable. The Variable Name Add window
displays. The field description for Variable Name Add window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Variable Enter variable name.

Data Type Selects data type of variable.

Variable Kind Selects variable Kind of variable.


Address Assigns direct address about variable.

Initial Value Enter initial value of variable.

Trigger Select trigger status about variable.

Retain Select retain status about variable.

Description Enter description about variable.


2 Inserts variable at the cursor location.

ATTENTION
• If you select Select/Add Variable with cursor placed in the
empty area, you can add new variable.
• If you select Select/Add Variable after selecting character
string, the character string is replaced into variable.

Inserting function/function block


Insert Function/Function Block at the cursor location.
Perform the following steps to insert function or function block.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to insert.
2 Click Edit > Function/FB. The Function/Function Block window displays.

428 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing program

Step Action

The field description for Function/Function Block window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Name Enters name of Function (Block) to use.

Search Searches Function (Block) about the entered


name.

List Used for sorting Function, Function Block.


Category Indicates category of Function (Block).

Function List Displays list of Function (Block) in the selected


category.

Function Information Displays information of Function (Block). In


case of Function, it is available to set
properties about input parameter. In case of
Function Block, it is available to set instance
name and instance class.

OK Click to save the changes and to close the


window.

Cancel Click to closes the window.


3 Function/Function Block is inserted.

ATTENTION
I/O parameters of function/function block are not inserted
automatically. Additionally, you should edit them.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 429


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.4. Viewing program

18.4 Viewing program


It describes about display properties in the ST program.

ST option
Perform the following steps to view ST option.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select ST.

The field description for Options window are as follows:

Field Label Description

Parameter information When inserting Function/FB, example text of


IO parameter is added.

Auto list members When you insert character string by keyboard,


variable or Function/FB starting with same
character displays.

Auto macro statement When you insert the control text of ST (IF,
WHILE, SWITCH), control text is completed
according to ST grammar.
Tab size Enters tab size.

Show tip text When cursor is on the character string in ST


program, description of character string
displays.

Auto indent When changing line with ENTER, indent is


applied automatically with same tab size of
previous line.

Enhance Character string used in ST program displays


with various colors according to variable,
comment, Function (Block).

430 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.4. Viewing program

Font/color
It is used for designating the font or color in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to change the font in the ST program.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select ST > Font/Color.
3 Change Font.

ATTENTION
• You cannot change the character size.
• Default font is “Fixedsys”.

Perform the following steps to change the color in the ST program.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select ST > font/color.
3 Change color.

Zoom
ST program does not support Zoom function.

Tab
When using Tab, Tab size is designated.
Perform the following steps to change the tab size.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select ST.
3 Select Change Tab size. For tab size 4, the screen is as follows:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 431


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.4. Viewing program

Step Action

ATTENTION
• Default tab size is 4.

• Range of tab size is 1~100.

Showing line numbers


Shows/hides line numbers in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to show line numbers.

Step Action
1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
2 Select SoftMaster Common Editor.
3 Check Show line numbers.

432 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

18.5 Additional edit functions


This section describes additional edition functions.

Book mark
You can set and remove the bookmarks.

Setting bookmark
Perform the following steps to set the bookmark.
Step Action
1 Move the cursor to set bookmark.
2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Removing bookmark
Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark.

Step Action
1 Move the cursor to remove bookmark.
2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 433


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Step Action

Removing all bookmark


To remove the bookmark:
• Click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.

Previous bookmark
To go to previous bookmark:
• Click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.

Next bookmark
To go to next bookmark:
• Click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

ATTENTION
• Bookmark is set by line unit.

• Undo/Redo cannot cancel action about bookmark.

Selection from character string list


When entering character string, it displays the character string starting with same
character string and you need to select the character string properly.
Perform the following steps to select character string.

434 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Step Action
1 Enter character string by keyboard.

2 Select character string from list.

3 Press Enter or double-click the character string.

ATTENTION
Following are the descriptions of character string list bit map.

1. : ST language key word (IF, CASE WHILE, and so on.)

2. : Variable name

3. : Flag variable name

4. : Function name

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 435


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Step Action

5. : Function block instance name

6. : User-defined function name

7. : User-defined function block instance name

Selecting member variable from character string list


It is used for selecting member variable from character string list by name of FB or user
data type instance.
Perform the following steps to select member variable from character string list.

Step Action
1 Enter ‘.’ after name of FB or user data type instance.

For example, instance name of TON is TON_Inst.


2 Select member variable to input.
3 Press ‘Enter’ or double-click.

Setting/removing block mask


Sets or removes the Block Mask area. The Block Mask area is not executed.
Block Mask area is indicated by symbol ‘(*’ and ‘*)’.

436 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Setting block mask


Perform the following steps to set block mask.

Step Action
1 Select area to set Block Mask.
2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

Removing block mask


Perform the following steps to remove block mask.

Step Action
1 Select area in which Block Mask is already set.
2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 437


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Step Action

Setting/removing line block mask


Selected line is not executed.
Symbol ‘//’ Is used to set Line Block Mask.

Setting line block mask


Perform the following steps to set line block mask.

Step Action
1 Select area to set line block mask.
2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

438 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Removing line block mask


Perform the following steps to remove line block mask.

Step Action
1 Select area to remove line block mask.
2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Indent/outdent
Enables you to indent/outdent at the selected area.

Indent
Perform the following steps to indent.

Step Action
1 Select area to indent.
2 Press TAB.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 439


January 2011 Honeywell
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions

Step Action

Outdent
Perform the following steps to outdent.

Step Action
1 Select area to outdent.
2 Press Shift + TAB.

440 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.1 Overview
The 2MLF-SOEA Module (event input module) is used for recording of events entered
from outside. The event input module is a data recording device which can record event
information (time and state) in 1ms resolution. The event input module is not a program
device or external device used in the CPU. Using the SOE monitor, the event input is
available only for monitoring and file saving.
• 2MLK/I/R CPU: saves 3000 events at maximum (Up to 3000 events can be saved in
the order of occurrence.)
• 2MLF-SOEA module: save 300 events at maximum.

Characteristics of SOE monitor


1. This is a software package for the operation and monitoring of the 2MLF-SOEA
module of 2MLT series.
2. This package provides a function that enables independent operation of the SOE
monitor, regardless of the SoftMaster.
3. This enables data monitoring and saving.

Functions of the SOE monitor


The SOE monitor is an exclusive software package which runs on a PC platform and
communicates with the CPU of ML200 series for easy and fast operation of 2MLF-
SOEA.
The major functions of the SOE monitor are as follows:
1. Read/save event history
2. Delete event history
3. View module parameter setting
4. Save event history in an Excel file

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 441


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.2. Screen configuration

Files created in the SOE monitor


When you create and edit a project, the files having the extensions below are created.
• <Name>.set: the log file for the event the user has created. This file is created for
saving the event.
• <Name>.xls: the module event file created by the user. Event record is saved in an
Excel file.

19.2 Screen configuration


This section describes the basic screen elements, windows and pop-up menus.
On the Monitor menu, click SOE Monitoring in the SoftMaster monitor state. The
following window displays.

442 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.2. Screen configuration

Field Description

Menu Basic menu is provided for using the software program.

Tools Menu can be easily selected and executed with toolbar.

SOE Shows the elements of the current project.

Event monitor Shows the event information of the module selected in


window the project.

Status bar Shows the information of the event and connected PLC.

Menu structure
If you select a menu item, commands appear. The commands can be executed with
mouse or keyboard. Some menus provide shortcut keys.

File
Command Description

New logging session Creates the project.

Open logging Opens an existing log file.

Save logging as Saves the log file with a different file name.

Export to file Saves the current log data in an Excel file.

Exit Ends the SOE monitor.

View
Command Description

All Event Shows all hidden events in an activated window.

Filtering Shows only the events meeting the filtering criteria.

Newest First Shows the data in the order of recent to old in the
monitor window.

Oldest First Shows the data in the order of old to recent in the
monitor window.

Compare Event Compares the events.

Find event Searches the desired event.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 443


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.2. Screen configuration

Command Description

Module Property Shows parameter setting (in online operation)

Online
Command Description

Connect/Disconnect Connects or disconnects from the PLC.

Connection setting Sets up access method.

Clear PLC Event History Deletes the event data saved in the PLC CPU memory.

Clear SOE Module Deletes the event data saved in the SOE module
Event History memory.

Clear all SOE Module Deletes all the event data saved in the memory of the
History SOE module in the PLC system.

Refresh Event Loads the event data of the SOE module.

Download SOE O/S Downloads the O/S files to SOE module.

Tool
Command Description

Option User can configure SOE monitor environment for user


convenience.

Customize User defines tools and commands.

Window
Command Description

New window Opens a new window in the activated window.

Cascade Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in cascade


layout.

Tile Horizontally Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in horizontal


layout.

Tile Vertically Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in vertical


layout.

444 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.2. Screen configuration

Command Description

Close all Closes all the windows of the SoftMaster.

Help
Command Description

About SOE monitoring Provides the information on the SOE monitor.

Tools
Frequently used menu items are provided with respective shortcut keys (icons).You can
click the icon to execute the menu.

Perform the following steps to create a new toolbar.

Step Action
1 On the Tools menu, click Customize.

The Customize window displays.


2 Click New.

The New Toolbar dialog box appears.


3 Enter tool name.
4 Click OK. A toolbar without tool creates.

The field description for Customize window are as follows:

Field Description

Toolbars Select/clear the check box to make the toolbar


appear/disappear.

New Creates a new toolbar.

Reset Initialize the toolbar.


5 Select the Command tab.
6 Click OK to create a toolbar.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 445


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.2. Screen configuration

SOE event history window


The SOE monitor displays the 2MLF-SOEA module SOE event history window
automatically when connected with PLC CPU.
Double-click the desired module to run the event monitor window.

• CPU event history: Select the event saved in the CPU module.
• Module event history: Select the event saved in the SOE module.
Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor
window.

Status bar
The following figure displays the status bar of SOE Monitoring window.

• Event No.: Shows the number of the events in the event monitor window.
• PLC name: Shows the name of the PLC connected with the SOE monitor.

446 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.3. Basic parameter setting

• Online: Shows the PLC connection status of the SOE monitor.

19.3 Basic parameter setting


Basic parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.

Setting items
Sets up the method of saving the history occurred in the 2MLF-SOEA module in the
CPU module.
In the project tree, click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic Parameter Settings
window appears.
• Save the latest SOE events: Used for saving the most recent event. If there are more
than 3000 events, the oldest event is deleted and the new event is saved.
• Save the first SOE events: Used to maintain the first event. If there are more than
3000 events, no new events will be saved.

19.4 I/O parameter setting


I/O parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.

Setting item
It sets up the method of saving the external event history in the 2MLF-SOEA module.
Perform the following steps to set I/O parameter.

Step Action
1 In the project tree, click Parameter > I/O Parameter. The I/O Parameter
Setting window displays.
2 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, click the slot of the base where the
module is mounted.

In the example below, the 2MLF-SOEA module is at #4 slot, #0 base.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 447


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.4. I/O parameter setting

Step Action

3 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, select the desired module from the
drop-down arrow.
4 After selecting the module, click Details. The SOE Module window displays.
The field description for the SOE Module window are as follows:

448 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.4. I/O parameter setting

Step Action

Field Description

Input Filter Sets up the time which enables an event to be


identified as an effective input data.

(Setting range: 1ms ~ 100ms)

SOE History Reset with recent history: used to save the most
recent events.

If the events exceed 300, the oldest event is


deleted and the last one is saved.

Retain initial history: used to retain the initial


event.

If the events exceed 300, the last one will not be


saved.

Event setting Set up the input condition of the event.


details
Type: Rise, Fall or simultaneously, Rise/Fall of
event can be set up.

Event conditions can be set up for each input


contact point.

Chattering: Abnormal signals not related with


event can be processed as chattering.

(Setting range: 2~127)

Example of input filter setting


Condition is as follows:
• Input filter: 1ms
• Detail event setting: ‘Rise/Fall’ events simultaneously
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 449


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.4. I/O parameter setting

Chatter setting
Chatter setting enables the module to identify an event repeated many times during a
short period of time as chattering, and not an effective event. Some sensors using
mechanical contacts may cause chattering, which can be eliminated with this function.

Setting items
1. Number of events: 2~127 (‘0’: detection is disabled)
2. Event number: Enter the number of the events including the first effective signal
(minimum 2)
3. Chatter detection time (duration): If the chatter detection time is passed from the
time the first effective event was detected, the chatter detection function for the
specific event frequency is terminated, even if the set-up number of chattering is not
completed.
4. Minimum chatter detection time (duration): Co-related with the set up chattering
event number.

450 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.5. View module information

In addition, since an event has passed the input filter, it should satisfy following criteria:

(Number of Events × Input Filter Value) < Chatter Detection Time (Duration)

or

Input Filter Value < (Chatter Detection Time (Duration) / Number of Events)

For example:
If, chatter detection time = 30ms, number of chattering events = 5,
30ms ÷ 5 = 6ms,
Therefore, the input filter must be less than 6ms.

Example of chatter setting


Condition:
Input filter: 1ms
Detail event setting: ‘Rise’ event
Chatter event: 4
Chatter time: 8ms
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 451


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.5. View module information

• Chatter time measurement: begins from the recognition of an event


• Two of the four events passing the filter are ignored by chatter detection function.
The last event which enters after expiration of the chatter detection time is recorded
normally as the first event of a new period.

19.5 View module information


SoftMaster supports viewing event input module information.
Perform the following steps to view module information.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect. After connecting to PLC, click Online > I/O
Information. The I/O information window displays.
2 Click Details. The module 2MLF-SOEA information displays.

19.6 Event history monitor


The events entered into the CPU and event input modules can be monitored with the SOE
monitor.
Perform the following steps to monitor event input modules with SOE monitor.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Connect. The SOE Monitoring menu is activated only after
connecting to PLC.
2 Click Monitor > SOE Monitoring. The SOE Monitoring window appears.
3 From the SOE Monitoring window, click Online > Connect.

The information of the event input module in the connected system displays.
4 CPU Event History: the event history stored in the CPU module.

Module Event History: the event history stored in the SOEA module.

Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the
event monitor window.
5 Double-click CPU Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.
6 Double-click Module Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.

452 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.6. Event history monitor

Step Action
7 Event history information:

8 Click View > All Event to search and compare all events.
9 Click View > Filtering to search the behavior of a specific event. The Event
Filtering window displays.

The field description for Event Filtering window are as follows:

Field Description

Specify Event Specify the bit at which the event has occurred.
Occurred Position

Event type Specify the input condition at which the event has
occurred.

Show SOE Used only for CPU event history filtering. Only the
installed position base and slot of event input module appears.
only

Base/Slot Used only for CPU event history filtering. Specifies


base and slot.

Begin/End Specify the event filter with the time and the first
event, and the last event.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 453


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.6. Event history monitor

Example of event filter


Event occurrence point filter setting:

Filtering result:

#0 bit

• Event occurrence point setting: No. ‘0’ bit Rise Event

• Event type setting: ‘Rise’ event.


You can also filter events based on Base and Occurred time.

Prioritizing events
• Priority to the recent events: the recent events have priority over the old events in
the display list.
• Priority to old events: the old events have priority over the recent events in the
display list.

454 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.6. Event history monitor

To view the recent events first, click View > Newest First.

From recent to older events

To view the old events first, click View > Oldest First.

From old to recent events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 455


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.7. Save as an excel file

Comparing events
Compare the events stored in the CPU and event input modules and show the result.
To compare the events, click View > Compare Event.

Deleting event history


Delete CPU history: the history stored in the CPU module is deleted.
To delete CPU history:
• Click Online > Clear PLC Event History
To delete the history stored in the module:
• Click Online > Clear SOE Module Event History
To delete the history stored in all the SOEA modules:
• Click Online > Clear All SOE module History

456 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
19. Event Input Module
19.7. Save as an excel file

19.7 Save as an excel file


This section describes how to save an event file as an excel file.
Perform the following steps to save an event file as an excel file.

Step Action
1 Select the event history to be converted into an Excel file in the event monitor
window.
2 Click File > Export to file.
3 Enter a new file name in the Save As dialog box.
4 Click Save to create a new Excel file.

ATTENTION
The conversion to an Excel file is effective only for the currently
active main screen (one window).
5 Open file in the Excel application (to read the saved event file in Excel).

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 457


January 2011 Honeywell
19. Event Input Module
19.7. Save as an excel file

458 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.1 Redundancy parameter
Redundancy parameter is configured for redundant operation. Redundant parameter
configuration is classified into operation mode setting and data synchronization area
setting.
Unlike the other parameters, redundancy parameter can be changed during operation and
modified parameter is synchronized between the master and the standby CPU, as soon as
the parameters are written to the PLC.
Note that you must use the Write to PLC function, to download the modified parameter.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 459


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.1. Redundancy parameter

Redundancy
Contents Operation
parameter

Though base error occurs in normal RUN


mode, system operates except for the
Base
base. And, if that base is restored, it
Hot Swapping operates normally.
Option
Though module is disabled, module
Module detachment error does not appear. If that
module is enabled, it operates normally.

When two power modules of expansion


Extended Base Restart and wait base are off, system is into WAIT mode
Power Failure (Ebxx).
Setup When two power modules of expansion
Base power failure error
base are off, CPU error appears.

Disable warning for single Disables warning message when one of the
power operation power modules in expansion base is off.

Disable warning for ring Disables warning message when ring


topology topology is failed.
Warning Option Disables warning message when the
Disable warning for single
project requires only master CPU without
CPU mode
redundant operation.

Disable warning message Disables warning message when fault


for fault mask removal mask is removed.

When the cable is disconnected, it is


Disconnection of the cable
instantly switched within 1s.

Master automatic switchover (redundancy


Switching
operation)
condition Disconnection of the server
connection When Master/Standby is acting as FEnet
server, if the cable of the Master is
disconnected, Standby becomes Master.

I/Q Base It synchronizes the data of I/Q Base data. It


can set from the first base to the final base.
Redundancy Select the check box, to determine whether
Synchronization to synchronize the I/Q area or not. If you
Area select the check box, it synchronizes from
first base to final base. The default value is
0~31 base.

460 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.1. Redundancy parameter

Redundancy
Contents Operation
parameter

M Area It synchronizes data of M area. It can set


from the position of first word to the position
of final word. Select the check box, to
determine whether to synchronize the M
area or not. If you select the check box, it
synchronizes from first area to final area.
The default value is %MW0~%MW2000.

R Area It synchronizes data of R area. It can set


from the position of first word to the position
of final word. Select the check box, to
determine whether to synchronize the R
area or not. If you select the check box, it
synchronizes from first area to final area.
The default value is %RW0~%RW2000.

W Area If R area is set, synchronization area of W


defines automatically.

PID Block It synchronizes data of PID block. It can set


from the first block to final block. Select the
check box, to determine whether to
synchronize the PID block area or not. If
you select the check box, it synchronizes
from block area to final block area. The
default value is 0 block.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 461


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.2. Redundancy PLC state window

20.2 Redundancy PLC state window


Redundancy PLC state window appears automatically when SoftMaster connects with
2MLR PLC.

The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy PLC state window.

Field Description

a Project name of SoftMaster or Program name of SoftMaster-


NM/System Monitor.

b A-side PLC Run mode.

c A-side PLC Warning: No display if warning does not exist.

d A-side PLC error: No display if error does not exist.

e Standby CPU image: Shaded PLC.

f CPU status display: Standby, A-side.

g Signal line: 1 line–Bus topology, 2 lines–Ring topology.

h CPU status display: Master, B-side.

i B-side PLC error: No display if warning does not exist.

j B-side PLC warning: No display if error does not exist.

k B-side PLC Run mode.

l Master CPU image: Colored PLC.

462 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.3. Control redundancy

20.3 Control redundancy


To control redundancy:
• Click Online > Control Redundancy.

Change of master CPU

The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy control window.

Field Description

Master CPU Display of Master CPU, A-side or B-side.

You can do a switchover the Master CPU It displays state of redundancy


changeable state. If it is disabled, it
displays the possible case to make
redundancy change.

Change Redundancy change command. If


redundancy change is not disabled, it
displays inactive mode.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 463


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.3. Control redundancy

ATTENTION
The redundancy state is changeable:
1. When the Master CPU is in stop mode.
2. When the Master CPU has error.
3. When the redundancy system is in run mode.

Standby CPU control

The following table describes the fields of the Standby CPU in the Redundancy Control
window.

Field Description

a The Standby CPU is available: Available Standby CPU state

b Standby CPU mode: Standby CPU Run/Stop mode change

c Standby CPU mode: Only Standby CPU Reset or Overall reset

464 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

20.4 System monitoring


System configuration and base information displays in System Monitoring window.

System configuration
To perform system configuration:
• Click PLC > System Configuration.

System configuration contains below information:

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 465


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

1. Connection state between base.


2. Connection cable type between base.
3. In case of electric cable, it displays measured time and distance.
4. It displays data synchronization cable between Master and Standby CPU.
5. It displays base information of selected base (click mouse button or press enter key).

Node count change


Node Count Change enables you to decide how many nodes displays in window.
To change Node Count:
• Click View > Node Count, then select node among [2], [3], [4], [5], [6].
Default setting value is 2.
• To view node count [2]: click View > Node Count - [2].

466 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

• To view node count [4], click View > Node Count - [4].

Base information
It displays base information installed in base.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 467


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Master/standby base

The above diagram displays the following:


1. It displays information and base number of CPU module.
2. State indicator: It indicates state of CPU.
3. RING: If it consist of Ring topology, LED indicates On.
4. RED: If it is operated by Redundancy operation, LED indicates On.
5. MASTER: If it is in master mode, LED is On.
6. CPU-A: If CPU-A is On, LED indicates On.
7. CPU-B: If CPU-B is On, LED indicates On.
8. RUN: If operation mode is Run mode, LED indicates On.
9. STOP: If operation mode is Stop mode, LED indicates On.
10. WAR: Warning occurs in CPU, LED indicates On.
11. ERR: Error is occurs in CPU, LED indicates On.
12. Key state: Key state information of CPU.

468 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Expansion base
It displays base number of expansion module.

Base information
1. Base information contains the information of base connection and cable.
2. By selecting expansion drive module/expansion manager and PLC > Module
Information, Base information displays.
3. Double-click the expansion drive module/expansion manager, the base information
displays.

The above diagram displays the following:


1. Base Number: Base number which is set in the switch of base setting for expansion
drive module.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 469


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

2. O/S version: OS version of expansion drive module.


3. Node Status: It displays connection status between bases whether it is in Ring or
Bus operation.
4. Base Total Count: Total number of nodes.
5. Port 1 Number: Base number connected with port 1.
6. Port 1 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 1. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
7. Port 1 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.
8. Port 2 Number: Base number connected with port 2.
9. Port 2 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 2. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
10. Port 2 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.

Base changing wizard


Base can be changed easily by Base Changing Wizard while PLC is operating. Base
Changing Wizard has four steps: Selecting Base, Removing Base, Installing New Base,
and Changing Base Finished.

ATTENTION
In 2MLR system, a part of expansion base can be exchanged according to
configuration of expansion base.
• Ring topology: All expansion bases can be exchanged.

• Bus topology: In Bus topology, final expansion base is only changed.

Perform the following steps to change base.

Step Action
1 Click Online > Base Changing Wizard.
2 In Selecting Base window, select base for changing and click Next.

470 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Step Action

The field description for Selecting Base window are as follows:

Field Description

a Information: Information of the Selected Base.

b Base module tree: It displays base module. Changeable base


displays according to connection state of expansion base ( :
Changeable base, : Non-changeable base).

c List of module on slot: It displays the information of module


on selected base.

d Back: It is always in inactive mode while selecting base step.

e Next: Next step to Removing Base step. It is in active mode


when you select changeable base.

f Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard execution.

ATTENTION
If Base Changing Wizard execution is canceled, selected base is
excluded from operation. Ensure to check Fault Mask and I/O Skip.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 471


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Step Action
3 Follow the information of Removing Base step and click Next.

The field description for Removing Base window are as follows:

Field Description

a Information: Information of the Removed Base.

b Back: Cancels Removing Base, goes to previous step.

c Next: Moves to Installing Base.

d Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard.

ATTENTION
Error in Removing Base is occurred when base is not removed.
4 Follow the information of Installing New Base, click Next.

472 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Step Action

The field description for Installing New Base window are as follows:

Field Description

a Information: Information of Installing New Base.

b Back: It is in inactive mode after base is removed.

c Next: Moves to Changing Base Finished.

d Cancel: Cancels the Base Changing Wizard.

ATTENTION
Error in Installing New Base is occurred when base is not installed. If
base is installed normally, error is occurred when module type is
different within setting module in I/O parameter and real installed
base.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 473


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Step Action

5 Click Finished, when Changing Base is completed.

The field description for Changing Base Finished window are as follows:

474 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

Step Action

Field Description

a Information: Information of Changing Base Finished.

b Back: It is in inactive mode after base is removed.

c Finish: Finishes Base Changing Wizard.

ATTENTION
Follow the below steps when base changing without Base Changing
Wizard.
1. Set I/O Skip setting to change on base.
2. Set Fault Mask on base.
3. Remove the base from PLC.
4. Install the base to change.
5. Release I/O Skip setting on corresponding base.
6. Click Online > PLC Errors/Warnings, check the error in base.
7. Click Online > I/O Information, check if the module is installed
normally.
8. If there is no error, release the Fault Mask on the corresponding
base.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For more information, refer to 2MLR CPU User’s Guide.

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 475


January 2011 Honeywell
20. Dedicated ML200R Function
20.4. System monitoring

476 SoftMaster User's Guide R200


Honeywell January 2011
Honeywell Process Solutions
1860 W. Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ 85027 USA

You might also like